Seat Alhambra Edition 02.05 2005 Minivan Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 272
1 of 272

Summary of Content for Seat Alhambra Edition 02.05 2005 Minivan Owner's Manual PDF

a lh

a m

b r a

ow ne

r s

m an

ua l

auto emocin

Foreword

This owner's manual and the corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself quickly with your vehicle.

Also, the regular care and maintenance and correct handling of the vehicle will contribute to the conservation of its value.

For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modifications and parts exchange.

If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner because as this belongs with the vehicle.

3Contents

Contents

The structure of this manual . . . . . . 5

Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Introduction to the subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Three point seat belt for the second row central seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Air Bag system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Integrated child seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Head restraints* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Controls and equipment . . . . . . . . . . 43

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Multifunctional* steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Onboard computer with multi-function indicator* 64

Navigation system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Keys with remote control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Doors, central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Radio-frequency remote control key* . . . . . . . . . . 81

Vent wing* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Switches in the central console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Seats and luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . 105

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Seats in passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Heated seats* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Adjustable steering column* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Luggage compartment/Mesh partition* . . . . . . . 119

Luggage compartment cover* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Roof rack/Roof railing* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Cigarette lighter/Electric sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Stowage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Drink can holder* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Automatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Cruise control system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Tips and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Four-wheel drive* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Wheelspin control (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)* . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Your vehicle and the environment . . . . . . . . . 167

The first 1,500 km and afterwards . . . . . . . . . . 167

Cleaning the exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Environment-friendly and economical driving . . . 169

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

4 Contents

Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Care of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Checking and refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Engine bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Servicing and replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Accessories, modifications and replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

First aid kit, warning triangle* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Vehicle tools, towing bracket*, spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Installing a radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Mobile telephones and radio telephones . . . . . . 223

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Tow starting/towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

General considerations on technical data . . . . . . 231

Weights and measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Fixing points for tow bar* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

2.0 85 kW Petrol engine. 6 gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

2.0 85 kW Petrol engine. Automatic gearbox . . . . 238

1.8 110 kW Petrol engine. 6 gears . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

1.8 110 kW Petrol engine. Automatic gearbox . . . 242

2.8 VR6 150 kW Petrol engine. 6 gears . . . . . . . . . 244

2.8 VR6 150 kW Petrol engine. Automatic gearbox 246

2.8 VR6 150 kW Petrol engine. 6 gears. Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

1.9 66 kW TDI Diesel engine. 6 gears . . . . . . . . . . 250

1.9 85 kW TDI Diesel engine. 6 gears . . . . . . . . . . 252

1.9 85 kW TDI Diesel engine. Automatic gearbox . 254

1.9 85 kW TDI Diesel engine. 6 gears. Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

1.9 96 kW TDI Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Measurements and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

General index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

5The structure of this manual

Before reading this manual it must be understood

This manual describes the scope of vehicle equipment at the time of publication. Some of the equipment described here will not be available until a later date, or is available only in certain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ALHAMBRA, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

Illustrations are intended as a general guide, and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when otherwise indicated.

The equipment marked with an asterisk* comes in series only in determined model versions, are supplied as optional only for some versions, or are only offered in different countries.

All registered marks are indicated with . Even if the copyright symbol does not appear this does not mean that the mark is not copyrighted.

The section is continued on the following page.

K Indicates the end of a section.

Caution

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Texts with this symbol refer to points relevant to the protection of the environment.

Note

Texts with this symbol contain additional information of a more general nature. K

The structure of this manual

Texts with this symbol contain safety information. They warn you of serious dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.

WARNING

6 Content

Content

This manual is structured to give you the information you need as quickly and clearly as possible. The contents of this Manual are grouped into relatively short sections making up chapters (e.g.Air conditioning). The entire manual is divided into five large parts which are:

1. Safety First

Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat belts, airbags, seats, etc.

2. Controls and equipment

Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of the vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, how to create a suitable climate in the passenger compartment, etc.

3. Tips and Maintenance

Advice relating to driving, care and maintenance of your vehicle and certain problems which you may solve yourself.

4. Technical Data

Figures, data, dimensions and measurements (for example fuel consumption) of your vehicle.

5. Alphabetic index

At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help you to rapidly find the information you require. K

7Introduction to the subject

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Safety First

Introduction to the subject

You will find important information, tips and notes on passive safety in your new ALHAMBRA in this chapter.

We have detailed everything you need to know about, for example, seat belts, Air Bags, child seats, safety for children and head restraints.

Please pay particular attention to the notes and warnings in this chapter in your own interest and in the interest of all passengers.

Please drive carefully. K

8 Seat belts

Seat belts

Why have seat belts?

It has been proven that seat belts give good protection in accidents. In most countries, therefore, the wearing of seat belts is required by law.

Frontal collisions and the laws of physics

This illustration shows a car driving towards a wall fig. 1. The vehicle occupants are not belted in.

The belts should be put on before every journey even in town traffic. This also applies to rear seats. Pregnant women too should always wear a seat belt. This is the only way to guarantee protection for the unborn child! For more information on this point page 14.

The routing of the belt is of major importance to the protective effect of the belt. How the belt should be worn is described on the next pages. K

WARNING

B1H-118 Fig. 1

Fig. 2

1000 kg

AL0-014

9Seat belts

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

The physical principle of a frontal crash is easy to explain.

As soon as the vehicle is moving, so-called kinetic energy is created by the movement of the vehicle, in the vehicle itself as well as in the vehicle occupants.

The extent of the kinetic energy effect depends largely on the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of the vehicle and the vehicle occupants.

The higher the speed and the greater the weight of the vehicle, the more energy must be dispersed should an accident occur.

The speed of the vehicle is, however, the more important factor. If, for example, the speed increases from 25 km/h to 50 km/h, the kinetic energy increases fourfold!

As the vehicle occupants in our example are wearing no seat belts, their entire kinetic energy can only be dispersed through the crash into the wall, should a crash occur. The consequences would be severe or possibly even fatal injuries.

If you are driving at a speed of only 30 km/h to 50 km/h, forces which can easily exceed 1000 kg are exerted on the body should an accident occur.

The forces exerted on the body will increase further at higher speeds, e.g. At twice the speed the forces increase fourfold!

Vehicle occupants not wearing their seat belts are thus not linked to their vehicle.

In a frontal crash, these people will continue to move forward at the same speed as the vehicle was travelling before the vehicle crashed! K

The danger of not using the seat belt

B1H-120 Fig. 3

B1H-160 Fig. 4

10 Seat belts

In case of a frontal collision accident, the occupants who are not belted up are thrown forwards and collide with parts of the vehicle interior, e.g. the steering wheel, instrument panel or windscreen.

Vehicle occupants who are not belted in may even be thrown out of the vehicle. This could even lead to serious injuries.

The wide spread opinion that you can protect your body with your hands in the event of a light accident is not correct. Even at low speeds of collision, forces which cannot be deflected act on the body.

It is also important that occupants sitting in the rear seats are belted in as they can also be thrown out of the vehicle in the event of an accident. Somebody sitting in the rear and not using a seat belt is endangering not only himself but also the occupants of the front seats. K

Protecting seat belts

Seat belts which are worn properly contribute to the correct seating position of the vehicles occupants. The seat belts help reduce kinetic energy considerably.

They also prevent uncontrollable movements which can also be the cause of severe injuries.

Vehicle occupants who wear their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the fact that kinetic energy is absorbed by the belt. The vehicle front structure and other passive safety measures, such as the Air Bag System, also guarantee a reduction in kinetic energy. The energy created is thus kept to a low level and the risk of injury reduced.

Our examples describe frontal crashes. These physical principles also apply, of course, to other types of accidents and to vehicles with the Air Bag System.

This is why you must put on your seat belt before every journey, even if you are only going just around the corner. Please also ensure that your passengers are correctly belted in.

You have seen how seat belts function in the case of an accident on previous pages.

Accident statistics have proven that the risk of injury is reduced and the chance of survival in a serious accident is increased if the seat belt is worn properly.

For this reason, the wearing of seat belts is a legal requirement in most countries.

The correct method of wearing the seat belt, and how the Air Bag System functions, is described on the following pages. K

B1H-123 Fig. 5

11Seat belts

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Safety notes on using seat belts

Note

In some export countries seat belt functions could differ from the 3 point or lap belts described on the next pages. K

B31-151C Fig. 6

The belts should be put on before each journey even in town traffic! This also applies to the rear seats.

The maximum level of protection by the seat belts can only be attained if the belts are worn properly.

Please ensure that the belts are put on exactly as described in this chapter.

Putting the seat belt on underneath your arm, for example, would considerably increase the risk of injury in the case of an accident!

The belt must not be twisted or caught, nor should it be allowed to rub on any sharp edges.

WARNING

Two people (including children) must never be secured with one belt. It is particularly dangerous to belt your child in when it is sitting on your lap.

The belt strap should not be worn over hard or breakable articles (glasses, ball pens, etc...), as it may cause injuries.

Bulky and loose clothing (e.g. an overcoat on top of a jacket), hinder correct fitting and working of the seat belt.

The belts give maximum protection only in the correct seating position page 105.

You must always keep your feet in the foot well during a journey never on the dashboard or on the seats.

The belts must be kept clean as dirt may affect the proper functioning of the retractors (see "Care of the vehicle" chapter).

The slot for the belt tongue must not be blocked with paper or anything similar, as the tongue can otherwise not engage properly.

Check your seat belts regularly. If you find any damage on the belt, belt connections, retractor or the locking pieces, the belt must be replaced by a Technical Service Centre.

The seat belts may not be removed from the vehicle or modified in any way. Do not attempt to remove the seat belts yourself.

Belts which are stressed and thus stretched in an accident must be replaced by a Technical Service Centre. At the same time, have the belt anchorages checked.

WARNING (continued)

12 Seat belts

How are seat belts put on properly?

Putting 3 point belt on

You must adjust the front seat to your height before fastening the seat belt. See the "Front seats" chapter.

The inertia reel belt gives complete freedom of movement when pulled slowly. Sudden braking, however, will cause the belt to lock.

The mechanism will also lock the belt when accelerating, driving down steep gradients or cornering.

Pull belt by the tongue slowly and smoothly across the chest and hips.

Push the tongue into the locking part of the seal until it engages audibly (pull to test!).

B1H-127 Fig. 7

Seat belts can only give their maximum protection in an accident if the backrest is in an upright position and the belt is fitted closely to the body.

WARNING

The tongue must be pressed into locking part designated for that seat and seat belt. The protective effect of the belt will otherwise be negatively affected and the risk of injury increases! K

WARNING

13Seat belts

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Seat belt position

Adjusting the seat belt height Fig. 8

Fig. 9 Fig. 10

B31-119C

B31-167C

The shoulder part of the belt must run roughly across the centre of the shoulder, on no account against the neck and must also be firmly in contact with the body.

The lap part of the belt must fit tightly across the pelvis not across the stomach. If necessary, pull the belt tight.

Please ensure that the seat belt is fitted properly. A seat belt which is worn incorrectly could also cause injury in an accident.

A seat belt which is worn too loosely could cause injury as your kinetic energy will throw your body further forward in an accident and it will be caught abruptly by the seat belt. K

WARNING

B7M-010C

14 Seat belts

The routing of the shoulder belt on the front seats and the outer seats on the middle bench can be set to fit the body properly with the seat belt height adjustment.

To adjust, push the upper relay fitting in the direction shown, hold in this position and move up or down so that the shoulder part of belt runs roughly across the centre of the shoulder fig. 10 on no account against the neck.

After adjusting, pull the belt with a jerk to ensure that the relay fitting is properly engaged.

Note

The seat height adjustment* can also be used to adjust belt routing on front seats.

Seat belt release

Taking three point belt off

To release the belt, press the red button in the lock. The tongue will then spring out.

Pass the tongue towards the door by hand so that the retractor can roll the belt up properly. A plastic knob in the belt holds the tongue in a convenient position. K

B1H-131 Fig. 11

Fig. 12

Pregnant women should always wear a seat belt too. The lap part of the belt should be as low as possible across the pelvis so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen. K

WARNING

B1H-132

15Seat belts

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Seat belt retainer* Three point seat belt for the second row central seat*

Fig. 13

Fig. 12 bis

Fig. 14

When taking off the three point rear seat belts on the outer seats of the middle row of seats, the belts must be pushed underneath the loops provided on the side trim panels. This will prevent the belts from being damaged when the back rest is folded forwards.

Before removing the single seats, you should remove the seat belts from the retainers so that the belts are not damaged. K

WARNING

B7M-613M

B7M-614M

B7M-089C

16 Seat belts

The three point seat belt provides a good protection to the passenger sitting on the central seat of the second seat row in the event of an accident.

The fig. 14 shows the three point seatbelt with its two lock flaps in rest position. It is located on the rear part of the ceiling.

Note

Also bear in mind the warning instructions on page 11. K

How to fasten on the three point seat belt

Hold the upper right of the seatbelt with your right hand, holding both lock flaps from the black piece, and pull forward.

Insert the lock flap (the largest piece with handling instructions on it) into the right hand-side lock slot of the seat fig. 15.

Now, pull the other lock flap with your left hand over your waist and into the left hand-side lock of the seat fig. 16.

The seatbelt must be worn tight on the waist, should this not be the case you should tighten it a little. K

How to unfasten the three point seatbelt

To unfasten the seatbelt, press the red press button on the locking device, this will release the lock flap by springing it out.

B7M-616M

B7M-615M Fig. 15

Fig. 16

17Seat belts

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Pull back the flap with your hand so that the roller device can roll in the seatbelt more easily. A plastic button fitted on the belt keeps the flap in the correct use position. K

Detachable seat belts for the third row of seats

The seat belts for the 3rd row of seats can be detached at the lower anchorage so that luggage compartment cover can be pulled to the rear or so that luggage can be loaded without seat belts getting in the way. Moreover, these anchorages can also be used as lashing eyes for pieces of luggage.

Detaching seat belts

Press flange in the direction shown and unhook downwards fig. 17.

Guide the seat belt upwards on the flange and insert the hook into the retainer in the side trim arrow, fig. 18.

Securing seat belt

Remove flange from the retainer and guide downwards.

Attach hook and pull up until the flange fixing is perfectly in place (you will hear a "clicking" noise).

Fig. 17

Fig. 18

B7M-046C

B7M-049C

18 Seat belts

Belt tensioner*

Safety for the belted-in driver and front passenger is increased by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front 3 point seatbelts to supplement the Air Bag.

In the event of serious front collisions, the system is activated by sensors which trigger a pyrotechnical charge on both belt automatic retractors.

This makes the devices roll up and tighten the tensioners.

Note

Smoke is released when the tensioners are activated. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

It is extremely important to observe all safety regulations when the vehicle or any of the system components are scrapped. Technical Service Centres are familiar with these regulations and can provide the necessary details. K

Securing the child seat

As soon as the child seat is no longer needed, the passenger side Air Bag should be made operational again by a Technical Service Centre. K

Any repair work on the tensioner system, such as the removal or installation of system components required for other repair works, should be performed only by a Technical Service Centre.

The protective function of the belt tensioner is capable of operating only once. If the belt tensioners have been activated at any time, the system must be renewed.

If you sell the vehicle, please pass on this Manual to the new owner.

WARNING

A child seat in which the child sits with its back to the direction of travel may only be used if the passenger side Air Bag has been deactivated by a Technical Service Centre. Otherwise the child would be in great danger.

Ask your Technical Service Centre about the conversion.

WARNING

Pull the seat belt firmly to ensure that the seat belt is securely attached. K

WARNING

19Air Bag system

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Air Bag system*

Description of front airbags

Supplementing the three-point seat belts, the Air Bag system offers additional protection for the drivers and passengers head and chest in a serious frontal collision.

In serious lateral collisions the side Air Bags reduce the risk of injury to the body parts exposed to the danger for the front seat occupants.

The Air Bag system is not a replacement for the seat belt but a complementary element of the passive safety concept of the vehicle. Please note that the best possible protection to be offered by the Air Bag system can only be effective when the seat belts are fastened.

Therefore, the seat belts should always be used, not only for reasons of statutory regulations, but also for safety.

Also bear in mind the instructions from the "Seat belts" chapter.

The drivers front Air Bag is located in the central cushioned part of the steering wheel.

The passengers front Air Bag1) is located in the dash panel above the glove compartment.

Both are marked with "AIR BAG".

Fig. 19

Fig. 20 1) This equipment will vary according to the country.

AL0-069

AL0-068

The seat belts and Air Bag system only offer maximum protection when seated correctly. K

WARNING

20 Air Bag system

Description of side and head airbags

The side Air Bags1) are located on the backside of the front seats fig. 21 and are marked with "AIR BAG" on the upper part of the back.

Head Air Bags* are fitted on the right and left sides, beneath the roof lining. These are identified with the inscription "AIR BAG". The labels are located on the upper linings of struts A, B, and C.

The head Air Bags completely cover the window area on both sides of the vehicle.

Components of the system

The system basically consists of:

an electronic control and monitoring unit (control unit)

two front Air Bags

two head Air Bags

two side Air Bags

a warning lamp in the instrument panel.

Air Bag functions are controlled electronically:

Each time that the ignition is turned on, the Air Bag warning light will light for about 3 seconds.

If at least one of the Air Bag devices is deactivated, the warning light will flash for approx. 12 seconds.

There is a defect in the system if

When switching on the ignition the warning lamp does not light.

Following the connection of the ignition, the warning light will not go off until after approx. 3 seconds.

After the ignition is switched on the warning lamp goes out and comes back on.

The warning lamp lights or flashes while driving.

B1H-209 Fig. 21

When a defect is present the system needs to be checked immediately by a Technical Service Centre. Failure to do so will jeopardise proper functioning of the Air Bag in the case of an accident. K

WARNING

1) This equipment will vary according to the country.

21Air Bag system

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

When are the Air Bags activated?

The Air Bag system is designed so that the drivers side Air Bag and Passengers side Air Bag are triggered in case of a serious frontal collision.

In case of a serious lateral collision, the corresponding lateral Air Bag1) and head Air Bag1) on the side of the impact will be triggered.

In certain accidents the frontal1), lateral1) and head1) Air Bags may be triggered.

The Air Bag system will not be triggered in case of light frontal and lateral collisions, rear collisions and overturning. In these cases, the vehicles occupants are protected in the conventional way by the seat belts.

It is not possible to define globally when exactly the Air Bag system will be triggered given that the circumstances of each impact may vary enormously.

During inflation, the Air Bag emits a fine dust. This is quite normal and there is no fire risk. K

Function of front airbags1)

When the system is triggered, the bags are inflated by gas opening in front of the driver and passenger.

The Air Bag inflation is considerably rapid and takes fractions of a second, to offer the best protection in the case of an accident.

Information about the operation and possible faults of the system may be found on page 20.

1) This equipment will vary according to the country.

B1H-194 Fig. 22

It is important to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or instrument panel so that the front seat occupants have the best possible effective protection if the system is triggered. The front seats must always be correctly adjusted to the body height.

WARNING

22 Air Bag system

Note

It is extremely important to observe all safety regulations when the vehicle or any components of the Air Bag system are scrapped. Technical Service Centres are familiar with these regulations and can provide the necessary details. K

Function of side airbags1)

When the system is triggered, the bags inflate using gas.

The Air Bag inflates in a split second to be able to offer additional protection during an accident.

Information about the operation and possible faults of the system may be found on page 20.

If you are not wearing a seat belt or lean forward whilst driving or are sitting in the wrong position, you are open to a higher risk of injury in an accident when the Air Bag System inflates.

Children must never be allowed to sit unsecured on the front seat whilst the vehicle is in motion. If the Air Bag System is triggered during an accident, children could be seriously injured or killed. For further important points please refer to the chapter on Safety for children.

No persons, animals or objects should be located between the front- seat occupants and the effective range of the Air Bags.

The protective function of the Air Bag will only be triggered for one accident. If the Air Bag has been triggered, the system must be replaced.

The steering wheel padded plate and the padded surface of the Air Bag module on the passenger side of dash panel must not have stickers attached, nor should they be covered or re-worked in any other way. These parts should only be cleaned with a dry cloth or a cloth moistened with water. No other items such as, for example, telephone or cup holders should be attached to the Air Bag module.

The components of the Air Bag system must not be modified in any way. Any work involving the Air Bag or the removal or installation of the Air Bag system components for other repairs (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should be carried out only by the authorised technical services.

WARNING (continued)

1) This equipment will vary according to the country.

B1H-210 Fig. 23

Any repairs to the side Air Bag, such as the removal or assembly of any system component in connection with any other repair work (e.g. removing the front seat), should only be performed by a Technical Service Centre. The

WARNING

23Air Bag system

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Function of head airbags*

When the system is triggered, the bags inflate using gas.

In this way, the entire window area is protected as well as the door frame areas (up to mid-door range), thus protecting passengers in the front and rear seats.

The inflated Air Bag will lose pressure relatively slowly through its tissue due to the pressure caused by the lateral movement of the occupant. In this way the risk of damage to the upper body due to a crash is greatly reduced.

When the lateral Air Bag is deployed*, the head Air Bag is automatically deployed on the side of the impact.

Information about the operation and possible faults of the system may be found on page 20.

correct functioning of the Air Bag system could otherwise be adversely affected.

If the seatbelt is not worn or an incorrect seating position is adapted (for example leaning to one side) during a voyage, there is a higher risk of injury due to the deployment of the Air Bag in the case of an accident.

To guarantee a maximum of protection from the lateral Air Bag, a correct seating position should be adapted and the seatbelt should always be worn.

There should be no person, animal or object between the front passengers and the action zone of the Air Bag. Also, no accessory or any other object should be installed in the deployment area of the lateral Air Bag that may impede its operation or even cause injury to the occupants of the vehicle.

Only light articles of clothing should be hung on the coat hooks. No heavy or sharp-edged items should be left in the pockets.

No excessive pressure should be applied to the sides of the backrest, nor should they be subjected to undue pushing or shoving etc. as the system could be damaged as a result. The side Air Bags would not be triggered should this happen!

Do not fit seat covers on the drivers or passenger seat. Otherwise, the functioning of the side Air Bag could be limited since it could not come out of the seat back. For further notes refer to the chapter Accessories, modifications and replacement of parts.

Any damage to the original seat covers or to the seam in the module area of the side Air Bag must be repaired as soon as possible by a Technical Service Centre.

The protective function of the Air Bag will only be triggered for one accident. If the Air Bag has been triggered, the system must be replaced.

If children are leaning to one side or adapt an incorrect position during a

WARNING (continued)

voyage, they are automatically exposed to a higher risk of injury in the event of an accident especially if they are seated in the passenger seat. They may be seriously injured or even killed as a result. K

WARNING (continued)

No modifications should be made to any components of the Air Bag system.

Any repairs to the head Air Bag, including assembly and removal of any parts of the system (for example, the roof lining), should only be performed by qualified personnel, so as to avoid damaging system functionality.

WARNING

24 Air Bag system

Deactivate Air Bags

Air Bags must not be deactivated unless there are specific reasons to do so, such as:

in the exceptional case where it may become necessary to use a child seat in the passenger seat, where the child is facing backwards.

if it is not possible to keep a minimum distance of 25 cm between the center of the steering wheel and the breastbone even though the drivers seat is in the correct position.

if handicapped people need special equipment in the steering wheel area.

if special seats are fitted (i.e. orthopedic seats without side Air Bags).

See the Technical Services for information about which Air Bags may be deactivated in your vehicle.

Always activate the Air Bags when possible, to protect the occupants of the vehicle in case of a collision.

Deactivation of the passenger Air Bag for the installation of a child seat

In the exceptional case where it may become necessary to use a child seat in the passenger seat, where the child is facing backwards, it is essential to deactivate the passenger Air Bag.

We still recommend the installation of the child seat uniquely on the rear passenger seat, and to avoid the need to deactivate the passenger Air Bag.

If use of the child seat has ceased, the passenger Air Bag must be reconnected.

Before the use of child seats, please read carefully the section on "Safety for children".

Only hang lightweight articles of clothing from the hooks inside the vehicle. Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged objects inside the pockets. Additionally, avoid using hangers when hanging clothes.

Keep the area between passengers and the Air Bag deployment zone free of other people, animals, or objects. In order for the Air Bag to inflate correctly (and for safety reasons), no persons, animals or objects should be located within the deployment range of the Air Bags.

Only use rolldown blinds in the rear windows if they do not block the Air Bag deployment area and jeopardise its functioning. Disregarding this caution could result in serious injury.

The Air Bag protection module will only be effective for one accident. Once the system has been deployed it must be replaced. K

WARNING (continued)

If in an exceptional case where you may wish to install a child seat in the passenger seat, where the child is facing backwards, it is essential to deactivate the passenger Air Bag. To not do so will put the child at risk of serious or even fatal injury. For any doubt about the deactivation of the passenger Air Bag, consult the Technical Service. K

WARNING

25Safety for children

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Safety for children

Safety notes on using child seats

It is clearly demonstrated by accident statistics that generally children are safer on the back seat than on the passengers seat. Therefore, children under 12 years of age must normally travel on the rear seats1). Depending on age, height and weight, they have to use a suitable child restraint system or a seat belt. For safety reasons, the child seat must be fit in the center of the rear seat or behind the passengers seat.

The physical principles apparent in an accident, which are detailed pages 8 to 10, naturally also apply to children.

As opposed to adults, the muscle and bone structures of children are not yet fully formed. As such, children are subject to a higher risk of injury.

In order to reduce this risk of injury, children may only be transported in special child restraint systems!

All vehicle occupants, and particularly children, must be belted in during the journey.

You should never allow your child to stand or kneel whilst the vehicle is in motion. Should an accident occur , your children will be thrown out of the vehicle and could be seriously injured.

If children lean whilst the vehicle is in motion or adopt an incorrect sitting position, they are subjected to an increased risk of injury. This applies in particular to children seated on the passenger seat when the Air Bag system is triggered during an accident. This could cause serious or fatal injuries.

A suitable child restraint system can protect your child!

Do not leave your child unattended in the child seat

Children under 1.50 m (approx. under 12 years of age) must not use normal seat belts without the child restraint system. This could cause injury to the stomach and neck. K

WARNING

1) Different norms may apply to different countries.

26 Safety for children

Ways to secure a child seat

1

4 5

2

3

AL2-000 Fig. 24

27Safety for children

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

U Adequate for the universal retention systems officially authorized with this age group. (Universal retention systems are those fixed by the adult safety belt).

L Adequate for retention systems with ISOFIX anchoring.

B Integrated retention system officially authorized in this age group.

X Seat space not adequate for children of this age group.

Approximate age group Number of seats

Front Central seat, second row, Rear outer seats and central seat in the passenger with two point seat belt second row with three-point seat belts1)

with with with with ISOFIX integrated ISOFIX integrated

Standard rings child seat Standard rings child seat

Group 0 < 10 kg X L X U U/L U

(0-9 months)

Group 0 + < 13 kg X L X U U/L U

(0-24 months)

Group I 9-18 kg B (only against U/B (only against 9-48 months) X L the direction U U/L the direction

of steering) of steering)

Group II/III 15-36 kg B (only U/B (only (4-12 years) X L in the direction U U/L in the direction

of steering) of steering)

U (only in exceptional cases).

(Slide the front passenger seat as far back as

possible and always disconnect the Air Bag)

1) Seats in positions 1, 2, 4, and 5, according to the illustration, as well as for positions 1 and 4 in the mid-exterior position, with seats in the second row and central seat in the second row position 3 with three point seat belt fitted from the roof.

28 Safety for children

Note

Child restraint systems tested according to the ECE-R 44.03 regulation are clearly marked with the ECE-R 44.03 test mark (capital E in a circle and a number indicating the country of testing, i.e. Spain is number 9). Only use officially approved child restraint systems suitable for children.

Only use officially approved child restraint systems suitable for children.

The ECE-R1) 44.03 regulation applies to child restraint systems. This regulation divides child restraint systems into four groups.

Group 0: 0-10 kg

Group 0+: 0-13 kg

Group I: 9-18 kg

Group II: 15-25 kg

Group III: 22-36 kg K

Group 0/0+

For babies weighing up to 10/13 kg it is advisable to use infant seats which can be reclined to the horizontal position fig. 25.

As soon as the child seat is no longer needed as described in the above paragraph, the passenger-side Air Bag should be made operational again by a Technical Service Centre. K1) European Union norm

IBN-110 Fig. 25

If, in exceptional cases, you must transport a child in the passenger seat (positioning the child seat so that the childs back is opposite to the direction of travel), you must have the passenger Air Bag deactivated by a Technical Service Centre. Failure to do so could result in serious injuries or loss of life. Go to a Technical Service Centre to have the system disconnected.

WARNING

29

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Safety for children

Group I

For babies and small children weighing between 9-18 kg. Best suited are child seats with safety board fig. 26 or child seats in which the child faces backwards.

As soon as the child seat is no longer needed as described in the above paragraph, the passenger-side Air Bag should be made operational again by a Technical Service Centre. K

Group II

For children weighing between 15-25 kg. Best suited are child seats combined with 3-point safety belts.If, in exceptional cases, you must transport a child in the passenger seat

(positioning the child seat so that the childs back is opposite to the direction of travel), you must have the passenger Air Bag deactivated by a Technical Service Centre. Failure to do so could result in serious injuries or loss of life. Go to a Technical Service Centre to have the system disconnected.

WARNING

B1S-003P

B1S-002P Fig. 26

Fig. 27

The shoulder part of the belt must run roughly across the centre of the shoulder, on no account against the neck, and must be firmly in contact with the body.

The lap part of the belt must fit tightly across the pelvis not across the stomach. If necessary, pull the belt tight. K

WARNING

30

Group III

For children weighing between 22-36 kg. and less than 1.50 m (5) tall. Best suited are seat cushions combined with the 3-point seat belt.

Children more than 1.50 m/5 tall can use the seat belts fitted without seat cushions. K

Warning notes

When using the belt, the section Seat belts should also be noted. K

Safety for children

Fig. 28 Fig. 29B1S-005PB1S-004P

The shoulder part of the belt must run roughly across the centre of the shoulder, on no account against the neck, and must be firmly in contact with the body. The lap part of the belt must fit tightly across the childs hips not across the stomach. If necessary, pull the belt tight.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, should you transport children or infants in the vehicle, by carrying them in arms or seated on somebodys lap.

WARNING

31

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Notes

Child retention systems designed for all ages are available for your vehicle from the SEAT Original Accessories Program under the name "Peke"1). These systems mentioned above have been especially designed and approved conforming to the ECE-R 44.03 regulation.

For the installation and use, attention must be paid to statutory regulations and the instructions of the restraint system manufacturer.

Attaching child seats with the ISOFIX system

Where rear seats in the second row do not have an integrated child seat, there are two fastening rings at each seat, between the backrest and seat cushion arrows.

With the ISOFIX system you can use these rings to attach a maximum of three child seats. When you fit the child seat you must be able to feel it set into place with a clicking noise on both sides (installation sounds). Pull the child seat to check whether it is in place (pull test!).

Safety for children

1) Not available in all countries.

Particular care is required if child restraint systems are used which are bolted together with the seat belts fitted in the vehicle. The bolts must be screwed into the hole for the complete length and tightened to 40 Nm.

Furthermore, the seat belts must be checked for correct routing. The belt must not be able to be damaged by sharply edged fittings.

Only one child per child restraint system is allowed. K

WARNING

Fig. 30

AL0-008

32

Integrated child seat*

Description

The integrated child seat* consists of the removable seat cushion, the supplementary padding for the seat back, the (double-banded) harness belt, and the slumber roll for protecting the child's head.

The integrated child seat is suited to children classified by ECE-R1)

44 standard in group I (9-18 kg), group II (15-25 kg) and group III (22-36 kg).

The child seat must be used with the slumber roll that is supplied for children of groups I and II.

For safety reasons, we recommend placing the seat for children of group I in the rearward-facing direction when the child has the harness straps fastened. In order to do so, simply remove the seat and turn it around and then re-install. See the chapter on "Rear seats". The child must be belted in using the (double-banded) harness belt.

Children of groups II or III who are belted in using the three point belt installed in the vehicle may only be transported on the child seat if it is facing in the direction of travel.

Safety for children

To guarantee a correct positioning of the ISOFIX child seat for weights between 9 and 18 kg (Group I), the backside of the front seat must be in the most vertical position possible. Of all the possible positions, it has to be in the most forward position.

For safety reasons, carefully read the instructions that come with the ISOFIX system child seats, and the Child Safety chapter. K

WARNING

For the integrated child seat for children from groups I to III, the seat back can only be locked in the first or the second position "Child safety" chapter.

WARNING

1) European Economic Community Standard.

33Safety for children

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Group I (9-18 kg)

Pull the loop in the direction shown 1 .

Press the seat bottom in the direction of arrow 2 until it engages.

Fold the child seat padding down in direction of arrow 4 using loop (arrow 3 ).

Gently fold down the backrest and remove the head restraint out of the backrest of the integrated child seat. Replace it with the front side facing the rear chapter Head Restraints.

In cars that have an integrated child seat in the sport* version, you do not need to turn the headrest when the seat is occupied by a child belonging to group I or II. K

Applying harness belt

The slumber roll should always be used in the case of children from group I and II.

No modifications of any kind may be made to the child seat.

Do not leave your child unattended on the child seat.

The seat belt must not be trapped or twisted nor run over any sharp edges.

If the child seat or one of its elements (e.g. shoulder strap) is damaged or becomes damaged as result of an accident, it is essential to replace the seat and/or the affected parts (we recommend contacting a Technical Service Centre).

When the child seat is in use, the seat cushions must always be in the highest position fig. 31, arrows 1 and 2. K

WARNING (continued)

B7M-146C Fig. 31

B

D

E

C

B7M-191C Fig. 32

34 Safety for children

Place the child as far back as possible on the seat.

Lay the belts right and left over the childs shoulders.

Slide the belt lock fig. 32 B with the tongue through the other half of the lock fig. 32 C and insert both halves, tongue

first, into the belt latch fig. 32 D , until it is heard to engage (pull firmly to check!).

Always make sure that the protective padding fig. 32 E is beneath latch fig. 32 D .

Pull the upper part of the harness belt fig. 33 1 downwards in the direction of the arrow, until the belt fits firmly against the body of the child.

Releasing the harness belt

B7M-645M Fig. 33

Fig. 34

Fig. 35

B7M-148C

The harness belt must always fit snugly against the child's body (even when wearing thick or winter clothing) in order to ensure that the seat offers the child the greatest amount of protection. K

WARNING

B7M-646M

35Safety for children

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Push and hold the release catch 2 in the direction indicated (see arrow). Pull downwards in the direction indicated by the arrow on the underside of strap 3 , keeping the release catch pressed down. K

Returning seat to normal position

If the child seat is no longer needed, first fold up child seat support into backrest and then, after pulling loop fig. 31 1 , press the load-free seat cushion down until it engages.

Turning head restraint

The head restraint must also be removed, turned and reinstalled in the normal position when the child seat is no longer in use.

In cars that have an integrated child seat in the sport* version, you do not need to turn the headrest when the seat is occupied by a child belonging to group I or II.

Installing and removing the slumber roll

If the slumber roll is no longer needed, first remove the head restraint "Headrests" chapter. Then pull off the slumber roll from the head restraint and then replace the head restraint. The head restraint must click in audibly.

The installation of the slumber roll is carried out in the reverse order of the instructions listed above. K

Group II (15-25 kg)

Fig. 36

Fig. 37

B7M-149C

B7M-104C

36 Safety for children

Pull the loop in the direction of arrow fig. 36 1 .

Press the seat belt in the direction of arrow fig. 36 2 until it fits into place.

Remove head restraint from the backrest of the integrated child seat and then reinstall the head restraint with the front side facing to the rear "Head restraints" chapter.

In cars that have an integrated child seat in the sport* version, you do not need to turn the headrest when the seat is occupied by a child belonging to group I or II.

Attach the three point belt.

Pull the tongue slowly and smoothly across the chest and hips and push it into the lock part fitted on the seat until the tongue engages audibly (pull to check!).

You can set the shoulder belt to fit the body properly by:

altering the belt height adjustment

moving the seat backwards or forwards

adjusting the angle of the backrest

moving the child seat, if possible, to the next set of floor mounting points and thus closer to the centre of the vehicle.

ensuring that the shoulder part of the belt runs under the slumber roll if the slumber roll has been installed.

Returning seat to normal position

If the child seat is no longer needed, the load-free seat cushion must, after pulling loop fig. 36 1 , be pressed down until it engages.

Turning head restraint

The head restraint must also be removed, turned and reinstalled in the normal position when the child seat is no longer in use.

B7M-150C Fig. 38

The shoulder part of the belt must run across the centre of the shoulder as shown on no account against the neck and be firmly in contact with the body.

The lap part of the belt must fit tightly across the pelvis not across the stomach. If necessary, pull the belt tight fig. 37.

The shoulder part of the belt must run under the slumber roll, when the slumber roll has been installed fig. 38.

WARNING

37Safety for children

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

In cars that have an integrated child seat in the sport* version, you do not need to turn the headrest when the seat is occupied by a child belonging to group I or II.

Installing and removing the slumber roll

If the slumber roll is no longer needed, first remove the head restraint "Headrests" chapter. Then pull off the slumber roll from the head restraint and then replace the head restraint. The head restraint must click in audibly.

The installation of the slumber roll is carried out in the reverse order of the instructions listed above. K

Group III (22-36 kg) The slumber roll must first be removed if it has been installed previous column.

Pull the loop in the direction of arrow 1 .

Push the seat bench in the direction of arrow 2 until it fits into place.

Attaching three point belt.

Pull the tongue slowly and smoothly across the chest and hips and push it into the lock part fitted on the seat until the tongue engages audibly (pull to check!).

Fig. 39

Fig. 40

B7M-108C

B7M-105C

The shoulder part of the belt must run across the centre of the shoulder as shown on no account against the neck and be firmly in contact with the body.

The lap part of the belt must fit tightly across the pelvis not across the stomach. If necessary, pull the belt tight.

WARNING

38 Safety for children

You can set the shoulder belt to fit the body properly by:

altering the belt height adjustment

moving the seat backwards or forwards

adjusting the angle of the backrest

moving the child seat, if possible, to the next set of floor mounting points and thus closer to the centre of the vehicle.

Returning seat to normal position

If the child seat is no longer needed, the load-free seat cushion can, after pulling loop fig. 39 1 , be pressed down until it engages. K

Cleaning child seat cover

Open zip A fully and clip out at end.

Pull cover away from velcro fastening in upper area B .

Feed lap belt and harnass belt through cover and remove child seat cover.

The child seat cover can be washed in the washing machine at a maximum temperature of 30 C.

Cleaning slumber roll

The cover of the slumber roll can be washed in a washing machine at a maximum temperature of 30 C. K

B7M-107C Fig. 41

If the child seat cover is to be refitted, please ensure that the cover is fitted to the seat in the area of the velcro fastening in such a way that the belts can move freely in the slits. K

WARNING

39

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Front seats

Front seats

Proper sitting position for occupants

The correct adjustment of the seats is important for:

reaching the controls safely and quickly.

relaxed low-fatigue body position.

maximum protection from the seat belts and the Air Bag System.

For seat adjustments pages 105 to 107. Please also note the basic positions for the drivers and passengers seats on this page.

Drivers seat

We recommend that you position the drivers seat as follows:

Set the drivers seat forwards/backwards in such a way that the pedals can be fully depressed with a slightly angled leg.

Set the backrest in such a way that it is fully against your back and that you can reach the upper point of the steering wheel with your arms at a slight angle.

Front passenger seat

We recommend that you position the front passenger seat as follows:

Backrest in an upright position.

Place the feet in the footwell in a comfortable position.

At the same time push the seat back as far as possible. K

It is important to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or instrument panel so that the front seat occupants have the best

WARNING

B1S-016P Fig. 42

possible effective protection if the system is triggered. In addition, the front seats and the head restraints must be adjusted to the body height.

No items must be kept in the footwell, as these could block the pedals in case of sudden braking.

Consequently, it would be impossible to brake, change gear or accelerate.

Feet should remain in the footwell when the vehicle is moving, never resting on the instrument panel or seats.

WARNING (continued)

40 Head restraints

Head restraints

Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints

Head rests are height adjustable and must be adjusted to the occupants height. Correctly adjusted head rests together with the seat belt offer effective protection. The angle of the front head rests may also be adjusted.

Vertical adjustment

Take sides of head rest with both hands and move it up or down.

The best protection is obtained when upper edge of the head rest is at least at eye level or higher. K

Removing and installing

To remove, pull headrest up and press the button in the direction of the arrow.

To install push the restraint rods into the guides to the stop and press the button.

Note

To achieve more comfort for the child in a child seat, it is possible to remove the headrest and turn it around. K

Fig. 43

Fig. 44

B1S-017P

B7M-1150

Air Bag system

Disconnecting the passenger airbag

Disconnecting the front and side passenger airbags

The passenger seat airbags must be disconnected when a backward facing child seat is fitted in the front passenger seat.

The key switch can be used to disconnect the front and side airbag for the passenger seat. The other airbags in the vehicle will remain active.

Disconnecting the front and side airbag

Turn off the engine.

Open the glove compartment in the central part of the instrument panel.

Turn the key switch to the OFF position using the ignition key fig. 199.

Check that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator on the instrument panel remains on when starting the engine fig. 200 .

Close the glove compartment in the central part of the instrument panel.

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Fig. 199 Glove compartment in the central part of the instrument panel: Key switch for activating and deactivating the passenger airbag.

Fig. 200 Airbag deactivation indicators in the instrument panel

Encart alhambra ing.qxd 25/5/05 10:42 Pgina 267

Air Bag system

Connecting the front and side passenger airbags

Turn off the engine.

Open the glove compartment in the central part of the instrument panel.

Turn the key switch to the ON position using the ignition key fig. 199.

Check that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator on the instrument panel remains off when starting the engine fig. 200 .

Close the glove compartment in the central part of the instrument panel.

The driver has full responsibility for the correct position of the key switch.

The front and side airbag of the passenger seat should only be deactivated in exceptional circumstances, when a child seat has to be fitted in the front passenger seat, and the child is seated facing backwards.

A child seat should never be fitted for the child to travel facing backwards in the passenger seat if the airbag has not been previously deactivated, as

WARNING

there is a risk of fatal injury. Nevertheless, if it is absolutely necessary to fit a child seat in the front passenger seat with the child facing backwards, the airbags of the passenger seat must be deactivated.

Activate the front and side airbag of the front passenger seat once the seat is no longer used for carrying children.

Deactivate the passenger seat airbag only when the ignition is not connected, otherwise a fault may occur in the airbag control. There is then a danger that the front , or the curtain, or the side airbag will not function properly in case of accident.

If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator does not light up and stay on when the front and side airbag are disconnected, there may be a fault in the airbag system.

The vehicle should be taken immediately to a specialised garage where the airbag system can be checked.

Do not use a child seat of any kind in the front passenger seat! In spite of the fault, the front or side airbag could be triggered in case of accident.

It is impossible to determine whether the front or side airbags will be triggered in case of accident. Your passenger should be made aware of this.

WARNING (continued)

Encart alhambra ing.qxd 25/5/05 10:42 Pgina 268

42

1 2 3 4 5 6 2019187 10

252628 222323 212427

15128 9 11 13 14 16 17

ALO-000

Fig. 45

Instrument panel 43

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Controls and equipment

Instrument panel

Table

Overview of the instrument panel

1 Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

2 Knurled wheel for exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

3 Control for electric window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

4 Light switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

5 Adjustment for instrument lighting/Light range adjustment . . . . . 92

6 Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139-141

7 Dipped beam lever and indicator/ Cruise control* . . . . . . . . . . 96/154

8 Instruments/warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45/56

9 Horn/drivers Air Bag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

10 Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

11 Windscreen wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

12 Switches for: Heated window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Window heating* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Heating left seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 ESP* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

13 Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

14 Radio1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

15 Drink can holder* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

16 Upper middle shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

17 Switches for: Hazard warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 PDC* (Parking distance Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Right seat heating* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Cover for additional switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

18 Glove compartment/Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

19 Passenger Air Bag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

20 Upper passenger shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

21 Gear lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

22 Ashtray/lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123/125

23 Controls for electric side windows* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

24 Handbrake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

25 Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

26 Steering column adjustment lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

27 Fuse box cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

28 Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

1) An additional instructions manual is delivered with vehicles fitted with a navigation system or radio in the factory. If the radio is fitted subsequently, the instructions in the Accessories, modification and replacement of parts chapter should be followed.

Instrument panel44

Some of the equipment above-mentioned is only installed on certain model versions or comes as an option.

Controls on right hand drive models may slightly vary from left- hand drive versions. Nevertheless both versions are fitted with the very same indicator signs. K

Instrument panel 45

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

In some model versions or in certain countries, it is possible to insert the ignition key and have the dash panel lights go on without switching the engine on. This function is independent of the vehicle's light connections.

Arrangement of instruments depends on the model and the engine fitted.

1 Oil temperature indicator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

2 Revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

3 Digital clock* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Outside temperature indicator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Multi-function indicator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

4 Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

5 Warning lamps display/selector lever positions* (automatic gear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

6 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

7 Mileage clock with Service interval indicator* . . . . . . . . . . 52

8 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

9 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

A Digital clock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

B Trip mileage clock/Reset service Interval indicator . . . . . . 52 K

Instruments

Instrument overview

Fig. 46

1/2

0 1/1

90

60 120

0

2

1

5

6

4

7

8

1/min x1000

3

0

20

40

60

80 100

140

180

220

260

30

50

70

90 120

160

200

240 Km/h

1

888888 8888.8service

k/miles 88:88

EPC

1 4 2

5

8 96

A3 7B

!

AL0-070

Instrument panel46

Temperature of the engine oil*

Do not demand full performance from the engine when the engine oil is cold. If in exceptional conditions the indicator is in the upper area, reduce the revolutions. The needle should return to the normal range.

If the needle remains in the upper zone, stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. Check the oil level in the engine. If the oil level is correct and the oil pressure pilot lamp does not switch off when you turn the engine on, drive to the nearest Technical Service Centre, avoiding high revolutions. K

Revolutions counter*

On no account must the revolutions counter needle move into the red zone of the scale.

For the sake of the environment

Changing up in good time helps to save fuel and keep the noise down.

Change down a gear at the latest when the engine turn over is no longer smooth.

Avoid high engine revolutions during the running-in period. K

Digital clock*

To set the digital clock turn knob A located on the lower left next to the rev counter.

The hours are set by turning the button anti-clockwise until it stops. By turning the knob once, you move forward one hour. By turning and holding the knob, the hours move forward continuously.

The minutes are set by turning the button clockwise until it stops. By turning the knob once, you move forward one minute. By turning and holding the knob, the minutes move forward continuously.

The knob can be used to set the clock to the exact second.

Turn the knob to the right until the time is set to exactly one minute before the required time.

Turn the button to the right just as the seconds indicator of an accurately set clock shows one full minute.

Turning the button to the left sets the clock to the required arrow. K

Outside temperature indicator*

The outside temperature is displayed when the ignition is on.

At temperatures from +5C to 5C, a snowflake symbol is displayed along with the temperature.

The snowflake symbol is to warn the driver to take extra care when there is a risk of ice forming on the road.

Instrument panel 47

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the temperature displayed may be slightly higher than the actual outside temperature as a result of radiant heat from the engine. K

Multi-function indicator*

Apart from the time, the multi-function indicator offers a variety of additional information.

Outside temperature*

Current fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Distance that can be travelled with the amount of fuel left in the tank.

Km driven

Average speed

Driving time

On the upper part of the display appears the symbol of the function, except if the time is indicated fig. 47 with average consumption.

If you press button B on the windscreen wiper lever while ignition is on additional information will appear:

Fig. 47

Fig. 48

0

2

1

5

6

4

7

8

1/min x1000

3

10.0 l/100 km

1

EPC

AL0-071

A B AL0-153

Instrument panel48

If you press the upper part of the button, the different functions will appear consecutively.

If you press the lower part of the button, the functions will appear in the opposite direction.

The following data can be obtained in this order by the memory:

Driving time

Km driven

Average speed

Average fuel consumption

The instantaneous fuel consumption will not be memorized but will always appear in an updated version.

Memory

Two automatic memories are fitted:

The individual memory (Multifunction indicator 1) collects the following data while ignition is on: driving time, kms driven and fuel consumption.

The calculation of the average speed and average consumption is based on this data.

If the trip resumes within the 2 following hours from switching off ignition the new data will be added to the one already memorized. If the interruption is longer than 2 hours, all data will automatically be deleted from the memory.

The global memory (Multifunction indicator 2) collects all data from all trips up to 100 driving hours, 10,000 km and 1,000 liters of fuel consumption. This data is used to calculate the average speed and average consumption for all individual trips.

In case one of these values is exceeded, the memory is deleted and a new count starts. As opposed to the individual memory, the global memory will not be deleted if the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours.

To consult data select the respective memory by pressing the "Reset" fig. 48 A button on the windscreen wiper lever.

The digital clock display will indicate the memory which was selected:

Multifunction indicator 1 (Individual memory)

Multifunction indicator 2 (Global memory)

Delete memories

If you press the "Reset" fig. 48 A button for more than two seconds the selected memory will be deleted.

If the battery of the vehicle is disconnected both memories will be deleted.

Visualized information

When the ignition is switched on the last selected function or the outside temperature with the ice symbol (warning for icy road) will appear on the display.

Instrument panel 49

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

No symbol - Time

The time appears even if the ignition is switched off.

The clock is set by turning the button next to the rev counter in the instrument panel page 46 "Digital clock".

C - Outside temperature

The temperature range goes from 40C to +58C. If the car is stationary or if driving at slow speed the indicated temperature may be slightly higher than the real temperature due to engine heat.

If the outside temperature is between +4C and 7C the ice symbol will appear on the display (warning for icy road).

This symbol will flash at first for about 5 seconds and then remain lit while the outside temperature is not above +4C or below 7C.

When the symbol for icy roads appears the multi-function indicator automatically indicates the outside temperature (warning for icy roads), regardless of the selected function.

If you wish to see the previously selected function press the fig. 48 B button on the windscreen wiper lever.

l/100 km - Instantaneous fuel consumption

Instantaneous consumption is shown in l/100 km. The computer calculates the consumption every 30 meters. When the vehicle is stationary the computer will display the last value in the memory.

On some models, the display will show fuel consumption in ltr/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position with the engine running.

If the instantaneous consumption display is selected when the engine is started, the computer will indicate the average consumption for the first 30 to 40 meters.

You can use this display to adjust your driving style to the desired fuel consumption.

l/100 km - Average fuel consumption

This mode shows the average fuel consumption only and not the consumption at the time of reading.

Once the memory is deleted the display will show the average consumption after approximately 30 meters. Until then, the display will show dashes instead of the value. The value is updated throughout the trip every 5 seconds.

If you select the individual memory (Multifunction indicator 1) the average consumption of a particular trip is displayed.

In case this symbol is used as an indication for icy roads, keep in mind that the road may continue to be icy even if the temperature is around +4C.

WARNING

Instrument panel50

If you select the global memory (Multifunction indicator 2) the average consumption for all individual trips is displayed "Global memory".

Note

The amount of used fuel will not be displayed.

km - Kms driven

In the Multifunction indicator 1 position the memory displays the kms driven since the ignition was switched on or since the memory was deleted. See previous page "Individual memory".

In the Multifunction indicator 2 position the memory displays the kms driven on all individual trips. See previous page "Global memory".

The highest display for either position is 10,000 km. When this is exceeded it will reset itself.

km/h - Average speed

See chapter "Average fuel consumption".

Driving time

The same is valid for "driving time" as for "km driven". The maximum time shown in the display is 99 hours and 59 minutes. When this is exceeded it will reset itself. K

Coolant temperature

The gauge starts to work when the ignition is switched on.

When the ignition is switched on the warning lamp C flashes for a few seconds as a functional check.

A Cold

Avoid high engine speeds and do not work engine too hard yet.

B Normal

When the vehicle is driven normally the needle should settle down in the central zone.

When engine is working hard and the ambient temperature is high, the needle may move a long way up.

Fig. 49

1/2

0 1/

90

60 120

5

6

BA

C AL0-072

Instrument panel 51

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

This is not serious as long as the warning lamp C does not flash.

C Warning lamp

If the lamp flashes and a tone is heard at the same time when driving, first check the coolant temperature being displayed.

If the needle is in the normal zone, top the coolant up at the next opportunity.

If the reading is in the right hand area, the temperature of the coolant level is too high. Stop, switch engine off and try to find cause of trouble "Coolant system" chapter.

Note

Bear in mind the warnings in the "Coolant system" chapter.

Additional lights in front of the cooling air intake interfere with the flow of cooling air. At high ambient temperatures and full throttle there is a danger that the engine will then overheat. K

Warning lamps display/Selector lever positions* (automatic gear)

This screen displays several warning lamps and depending on the model version also written messages chapter "Onboard computer/navigation".

Information on selector lever positions appear in the chapter "Automatic gear". K

Fuel gauge

This gauge works when ignition is switched on.

The tank holds about 70 litres.

When the needle reaches the red reserve zone (arrow) and the warning lamp D lights up, there is about 8 litres (2 gallons) of fuel left in the tank. K

Fig. 50

1/2

0 1/1

90

120

40

60

80

50

70

90

D !AL0-073

Instrument panel52

Mileage clock/Trip mileage

The upper counter registers the total distance driven and the lower one the short trips.

The last figure of the lower counter indicates 100 m.

The trip mileage can be put back to zero by pressing the reset knob fig. 46 B next to the speedometer. K

Service interval indicator*

If a service is due, the word "Service" will flash for about 20 seconds when the engine is switched on, the vehicle is not moving and the mileage clock reset button is not touched.

The deadline for any service will be displayed 3,000 km in advance.

Intermittent service* for 20 seconds. Indicates that the time for a new service has elapsed.

Service Km 3,000* for 20 seconds. Indicates that the next service is due in 3,000 km. Every 100 km the number of km will decrease by 100 km up to the indication "Service".

After the service has been performed the display needs to be reset.

The display will be reset by a Technical Service Centre as follows:

With the ignition switched off, press and hold the trip meter reset button below the speedometer.

Switch ignition on and release the reset button. The display will show the next service.

Turn the minute button of the digital clock to the right.

Switch ignition off. Now the service indicator has been set to zero.

The service indicator cannot be completely set to zero. It can only be set to 15,000 km.

Note

Do not zero the display between the Service intervals. Otherwise an incorrect reading will be shown.

If the battery is disconnected the details in the service display are retained.

If the instrument panel changes due to repair, the service interval display must be reset. This should be carried out by a Technical Service Centre. Should the display not be reprogrammed, then the service work should be carried out in accordance with the Inspection and Maintenance Plan and not according to the Service Interval Display. The Service interval indicator only becomes valid again after carrying out an inspection and resetting the indicator.

Fault indicator

If a failure occurs, "FAIL" would appear either on the instrument panel or the trip meter. The defect should be repaired by a Technical Service Centre as soon as possible. K

Instrument panel 53

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Speedometer

The speedometer is fitted with a digital mileage clock and a trip mileage clock as well as a service interval indicator* and outside temperature*.

During the running-in period the instructions in the chapter "The first 1,500 kilometres and afterwards" should be noted. K

Voltmeter

The voltmeter shows the voltage of the vehicles electrical installation. The normal reading lies between 12 and 15 V. If the voltage falls below 12 V with the engine running, have the power supply (battery and generator) checked at a Technical Service Centre "Warning lamps" chapter.

During engine starting the voltage can fall below 8 V. K

220

260

240

8 8

AL0-074 Fig. 51

Instrument panel54

Multifunctional* steering wheel

Speed regulator*

Rocker button 1

Lower SET area :

Press once the actual speed is stored in memory.

Press twice reduce speed

As long as you keep pressing this area speed will be reduced. The speed reached when releasing will be stored in memory.

Upper RES + area:

Press once returned to memorized position

Press twice Accelerate

As long as you keep pressing this area speed will be increased. The speed reached when releasing will be stored in memory.

Rocker button 2

Lower area CANCEL:

Press once The speed regulator will disconnect briefly. The speed to be maintained will be stored in memory. To return to the memorized speed press RES + once.

Note

The speed regulator can be switched on or off with the sliding switch on the indicator and dip light lever.

Lights

On the right there is a button* to connect and disconnect the illumination of the multifunction steering wheel switches.

For more information "Speed cruise control" chapter. K

1

2

B45-379K Fig. 52

Instrument panel 55

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Audio set*

Rocker button 3

Press the upper area VOL + : Increase volume

Press lower area VOL : Reduce volume

Rocker button 4

Press upper area

Forward station search (radio)

Forward TIM messages (Navigation system*/Radio SCALA)

Fast forward (cassette mode*)

Forward title search (CD mode*)

Press lower area:

Backward station search (radio)

Backward TIM messages (Navigation system*/Radio SCALA)

Fast backward (cassette mode*)

Backward title search (CD mode*) K

3

4

B45-380K Fig. 53

Instrument panel56

The layout of the warning lamps depends on the model version and engine fitted. The symbols shown here are also on the actual warning lamps.

Warning lamps

Overview of the warning lamps

Fig. 54

1/2

0 1/1

90

60 120

0

2

1

5

6

4

7

8

1/min x1000

3

0

20

40

60

80 100

140

180

220

260

30

50

70

90 120

160

200

240 Km/h

1

PRN 321 888888 8888 8service88:88

EPC

!

1 2 3 4 7 16151413

12

24 22 19 17

11105 6 8

9

23 21 1820

7

AL0-075

Instrument panel 57

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Further information

1 Air Bag page 58

2 Trailer turn signals* page 58

3 Cruise control* page 58

4 Selector lever lock page 58

5 Rear fog light page 58

6 Diesel pre-heating system page 58

7 Turn signals page 58

8 Engine failure* page 59

9 Main beam page 59

10 Diagnosis/excess pollution* page 59

11 Wheel spin regulator (TCS) page 59

11 Electronic stability program* (ESP) page 59

12 Anti-locking brake system ABS* page 59

Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Further information

13 Electronic immobilizer* page 60

14 Brakes/Hand brake page 60

15 Alternator page 61

16 Seat belt warning lamp* page 61

17 Fuel reserve* page 61

18 Headlight failure* page 61

19 Open bonnet/tailgate warning lamp* page 61

20 Windscreen washer fluid level* page 62

21 Open doors warning lamp* page 62

22 Brake pad wear monitor* page 62

23 Engine oil pressure/level* page 62

24 Coolant temperature/level page 63 K

Instrument panel58

Air Bag

The warning lamp lights for a few seconds when switching on the ignition. If the passengers Air Bag is deactivated the warning lamp will flash for approximately 12 seconds chapter "Air Bag system.

If the warning lamp does not go out, lights up or flashes while driving it indicates that Air Bag is not in order. Proceed immediately to a Technical Service Centre to have it checked. K

Trailer turn signals*

The warning lamp* flashes when turn signals are switched on while towing a trailer.

If a turn signal fails on the trailer or vehicle, the warning lamp does not flash. K

Cruise control*

The warning lamp flashes if the cruise control is switched on. For more information see the "Cruise control" chapter. K

Selector lever lock

The warning lamp lights up when the selector lever is in position P and N. To unlock it is necessary to press the brake pedal chapter "Automatic gear". K

Rear fog light

The warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on. For more details "Switches" chapter. K

Pre-heating system

(Diesel engines only)

The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and the engine is cold.

If the warning lamp does not light up there is a failure in the pre- heating system. Seek expert help.

Start the engine once the warning lamp goes out "Starting engine" chapter.

If the engine is at operational temperature, the warning lamp does not come on; you can drive immediately.

If there was an engine failure in the diesel engine while driving, the warning lamp would flash. The engine must be checked as soon as possible by a Technical Service Centre. K

Turn signals

The warning lamp flashes at the same time as the indicator. If a turn signal fails the warning lamp flashes approximately twice as fast. Not applicable when towing a trailer.

For more details "Indicators and dipped beam lever" chapter. K

Instrument panel 59

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Engine failure*

Petrol engine

Diesel engine

If there was an engine failure while driving, the corresponding warning lamp would light (petrol engine) or would start to flash (diesel engine). The engine must be checked as soon as possible by a Technical Service Centre. K

Main beam

The warning lamp comes on when the beam is on or when the headlight flasher is used. K

Diagnosis*

The warning lamp will flash in the event of a breakdown in the petrol engines electrical system while driving. The engine must be checked as soon as possible by a Technical Service Centre. K

Wheel spin regulator of the driving wheels (TCS)

The warning lamp comes on when the ignition is switched on, and should go out after about 2 seconds.

If the TCS works while the vehicle is in motion, the warning lamp flashes.

If the system is disconnected or has a fault, the warning lamp will stay on.

As the TCS works in combination with the ABS, if the ABS breaks down the TCS warning lamp also comes on.

For more information see page 164. K

Electronic stability program (ESP)*

The warning lamp comes on when the ignition is switched on, and should go out after about 2 seconds.

If the ESP works while the vehicle is in motion, the warning lamp flashes.

If the system is disconnected or has a fault, the warning lamp will stay on.

As the ESP works in combination with the ABS, if the ABS breaks down the ESP warning lamp also comes on.

For more information see page 165. K

Anti-locking brake system (ABS)*

This warning lamp monitors the ABS and EDS* systems.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)*

The warning lamp comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on or the engine started. The lamp goes out after an automatic test sequence has been completed.

If the ABS warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is switched on, does not go out or comes on when driving, the system is faulty.

Instrument panel60

A fault in the ABS system is indicated as follows:

If the ABS warning lamp lights up, the vehicle can still be braked with normal braking system but without ABS. We recommend contacting a Technical Service Centre as soon as possible.

If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with brake system warning lamp. Not only is the ABS system defective but a change in normal braking characteristics can also be expected.

For more information on the ABS system page 162.

Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)*

The EDL system works in conjunction with the ABS. The vehicle should be taken to a Technical Service Centre as soon as possible.

For more information on the EDS system page 164. K

Electronic immobilizer*

When switching the ignition on, the data from the vehicle key is automatically processed. The warning lamp will flash to confirm that the data is being compared.

If a non-authorized key is used the warning lamp will flash permanently. The ignition will not work "Keys" chapter. K

Brakes/Hand brake

The warning lamp must come on if

the hand brake is set

If you drive with the hand brake set at more than 6 km/h an acoustic warning signal will sound.

the brake fluid level is too low

The ignition must be switched on.

In vehicles with anti-lock system* (ABS), the warning lamp comes on for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after starting the engine. If the ABS* system was faulty the brake warning lamp would also come on together with the ABS.

If both warning lamps come on, stop the vehicle and check the brake fluid in the deposit. If the brake fluid level is below the "MIN" mark, do not drive vehicle and seek expert assistance. If the brake fluid level is correct, the defect may be found in the ABS. If the ABS regulating system fails, the rear wheels may quickly lock while braking and, under certain circumstances, cause the rear of the vehicle to spin out.

Proceed immediately to a Technical Service Centre while exercising extreme caution to have the fault repaired.

WARNING

If you release the hand brake and the brake warning lamp does not go out or comes on while driving the brake fluid level in the deposit is too low. Stop the vehicle immediately and get expert assistance before you continue driving.

WARNING

Instrument panel 61

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Alternator

The warning lamp will come on when the ignition is switched on. It must go out after the engine has been started.

The alternator is driven by a long-life ribbed belt.

If the warning lamp comes on while driving, stop, turn off engine and check ribbed belt.

If the belt is loose or broken, do not drive since the coolant pump is no longer being driven. The belt must be checked or replaced.

If the warning lamp comes on even though the ribbed belt is not broken or loose, one can proceed normally to the nearest Technical Service Centre.

Since the battery will continue to discharge it is advisable to switch off all unessential electrical consumers. K

Seat belt warning lamp*

This warning lamp (only in some countries) lights for about 6 seconds when the ignition is switched on as a reminder to fasten your seat belts.

If the seat belt is not fastened an acoustic signal will sound after switching on the ignition which will stop after about 6 seconds or when the seat belt is fastened.

Check the "Seat belts" chapter. K

Fuel reserve*

The warning lamp will light up once there are about 7/81) liters left in the tank. An acoustic signal will sound at the same time. K

Headlight failure*

This warning lamp lights if there is a defect in the main beam. K

Open tailgate warning lamp*

This warning lamp comes on when the tailgate is open.

This warning lamp goes out only if the bonnet/tailgate is completely closed. K

If both the brake and ABS warning lamps come on, this may be related to a defect in the ABS regulation which could, under certain circumstances, cause the rear of the vehicle to spin out.

Proceed immediately to a Technical Service Centre while exercising extreme caution to have the fault repaired. K

WARNING (continued)

1) Four-wheel drive.

Instrument panel62

Windscreen washer fluid level*

This warning lamp will light up if the fluid level in the windscreen washer container is too low.

Add water for the windscreen washers and headlight washers* "Windscreen washer" chapter. K

Open door warning lamp*

This warning lamp will light up if any of the doors is open or not properly closed. K

Brake pad wear monitor*

The warning lamp will light up if the front pads are worn out.

You should proceed immediately to a Technical Service Centre to have the brake pads checked.

Since this warning lamp indicates the wear of the front pads only, it is advisable to have the rear brake pads checked at the same time. K

Engine oil pressure/level*

The warning lamp lights up for a few seconds as a functional check when ignition is switched on.

If the warning lamp is red or yellow or flashes it indicates that the engine oil pressure or level is too low. This warning lamp will also light up if there is a defect in the oil level indicator.

If lights up or flashes red (insufficient oil pressure)

If the warning lamp lights up or flashes red while driving an acoustic signal will sound three times at engine speeds above 1500 rpm. Stop and switch engine off: check oil level and add oil, if necessary "Engine oil" chapter.

If the warning lamp flashes even though the oil level is in order, do not continue driving. Do not even run the engine at idling speed. Call in expert assistance.

If while driving the engine speed decreases below idling speed the oil pressure warning lamp may light up. Increase engine speed by accelerating or changing down gear.

Lights up yellow (oil level* too low)

The yellow warning lamp indicates that the oil level is too low. Stop engine and add oil "Engine oil" chapter.

When opening the bonnet the oil level warning is reset. However, if you do not refill oil the warning will reappear after about 100 km.

Flashes yellow (defective oil level* indicator)

If the oil level indicator is defective an acoustic signal will sound and the warning lamp will flash several times.

At the same time the onboard computer will display a warning for a short time "Onboard computer" chapter. Take the vehicle to a Technical Service Centre as soon as possible to have the engine checked.

From the moment of the defect to the check-up of the engine the oil level needs to be checked regularly, preferably when filling the tank. K

Instrument panel 63

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Coolant temperature/level

The warning lamp lights up for a few seconds as a functional check when ignition is switched on.

If the warning lamp does not go out, or lights up or flashes while driving the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level too low. An acoustic signal will sound three times as an additional warning:

Stop immediately, stop engine and check level. If necessary add coolant. The coolant type is detailed in the "Coolant system" chapter. If the coolant level is in order the trouble may be due to failure of

the radiator fan. In this case, check radiator fan fuse and replace if necessary.

If the warning lamp does not go out even though coolant level and fan fuse are in order, do not drive on. Call in expert assistance.

If the trouble is located only in the radiator fan and the coolant level is in order and temperature warning lamp is off you may drive on to the nearest Technical Service Centre. To make use of the air stream for cooling do not let engine idle nor drive very slowly. K

Never open the bonnet if you see steam or coolant coming from the engine compartment! Risk of scalding. Wait until no more steam or coolant can be seen.

Do not touch fan. Fan could switch on suddenly even if engine is switched off.

WARNING

Please note the following points to avoid scalding with hot coolant:

Exercise caution when opening the coolant expansion tank! When the engine is hot the coolant system is under pressure. Let engine cool down before unscrewing the cap.

To protect your face, hands and arms from steam or hot fluid cover the cap with a large cloth.

Ensure that coolant fluid does not drop on the hot exhaust or any other hot engine component. The antifreeze in the coolant could ignite.

WARNING (continued)

Instrument panel64

Onboard computer with multi-function indicator*

Description

In the fig. 55 you see a display of instruments in vehicle fitted with a navigational or telematic* system. In the fig. 56 you see a display for vehicles with onboard computers.

In these displays you see information of the multi-function indicator and onboard computer. Instructions and functions for the multifunction indicator are described in the "Instruments" chapter.

Caution

Depending on the model version or the country, please keep in mind that some of the messages may not appear in the fitted equipment* of your vehicle or they may not correspond to the ones described in this Instructions Manual as date of print.

For this reason, we recommend that for additional information you also check carefully the "Warning lamps" chapter where you will find the different symbols and a description of their operation.

While the ignition is switched on and you are driving the onboard computer continuously checks the functioning of certain systems and components of the vehicle.

Malfunctioning, repair work or urgent servicing is indicated by acoustic signals and, depending on the priority, by red and yellow warning lamps in the instrument panel.

In addition to red and yellow symbols information will also appear in the drivers display.

The informative text in the illustrations of this Instructions Manual appear in Spanish. Depending on the country, the information and warning for the driver will appear in the following languages:

English, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese and Czech. K

6

7

8

1/min x1000

0

20

40

60

30

50

7

Km/h

C

AL0-076

6

7

8

1/min x1000

0

20

40

60

30

50

7

Km/h

C

AL0-077

Fig. 55

Fig. 56

Instrument panel 65

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Function check

Vehicles with manual gear

Malfunctioning will be displayed once the ignition is switched on. At the same time the corresponding acoustic signal will sound.

Vehicles with automatic gear

Once the ignition is switched on and the lever is in the positions "P" or "N" the warning will appear on the drivers display:

"STOP CAR, PRESS BRAKES TO SET SPEED".

After choosing the speed ("R", "D" etc.) this warning will disappear.

In case of one or more malfunctions the warning will disappear after 15 seconds from switching on the ignition and the symbols of the corresponding malfunction with the respective informative text will be displayed.

For all vehicles:

In case of malfunction an acoustic signal will sound with the following display:

Priority 1 three acoustic signals

Priority 2 one acoustic signal

With malfunctions of priority 1 and 2 simultaneously three acoustic signals will sound.

In case of malfunction the symbol with the corresponding informative text will be displayed.

Note

The priority 2 malfunctions will appear once the priority 1 malfunctions are repaired or eliminated. K

Priority 1 (red symbols)

The priority 1 symbols signal danger. For this reason, stop the vehicle and turn off engine.

Eliminate defect. The help of a mechanic may be necessary.

If there are several priority 1 malfunctions the symbols will appear consecutively for about 2 seconds. The symbols will flash until the defect has been corrected.

The following priority 1 malfunction or warning may appear:

Engine oil pressure

The corresponding warning is:

"STOP PRESS OIL" STOP ENGINE!

If this symbol begins to flash while driving you must stop the vehicle and switch off engine. Check oil level and, if necessary, add oil "Engine oil" chapter.

Instrument panel66

If this symbol continues to flash even though the oil level is in order, do not continue driving. The engine must not run even at idle speed. Call in for expert assistance.

Brake system

This symbol checks three functions simultaneously:

1. Brake fluid

The corresponding warning is:

"STOP. BRAKE FLUID INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL".

This symbol appears if the brake fluid level is too low.

Stop the vehicle and check the brake fluid level.

2. ABS, EDS*, TCS* and ESP* systems

The corresponding warning is:

"STOP BRAKES FAILURE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL".

If the warning lamp for brakes flashes while the warning lamp for ABS comes on the ABS system may be malfunctioning and the normal brake system behavior may be altered.

For further information on the ABS system page 162.

The EDS and ABS system work together. If the EDS does not work the ABS warning lamp will light up. This warning lamp will also light up if the ASR and ESP fail. The vehicle should be taken to a Technical Service Centre as soon as possible.

3. Hand brake

The corresponding warning is:

"HAND BRAKE SET".

The warning lamp lights up if the hand brake is set and the ignition is switched on. It will disappear when the hand brake is released. If not, there is a failure in the brake system.

If driving at more than 6 km/h an acoustic signal will sound.

If the brake fluid level in the container is below the "MIN" mark, wait for expert assistance before driving again.

If the brake fluid level is correct the defect may be due to the ABS. If the regulation system of the ABS fails, the rear wheels could lock quickly when braking and, under certain circumstances, cause the rear of the vehicle to spin out.

Proceed immediately to a Technical Service Centre while exercising extreme caution to have the fault repaired.

WARNING

If both warning lamps are on stop the vehicle and check the brake fluid level in the container. If the fluid level is under the "MIN" mark stop your vehicle and call for expert assistance.

If the fluid level is in order the failure may be due to the ABS. If the ABS regulatory system fails, the rear wheels could lock quickly when braking and, under certain circumstances, cause the rear of the vehicle to spin out.

Proceed immediately to a Technical Service Centre while exercising extreme caution to have the fault repaired.

WARNING

Instrument panel 67

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Coolant temperature/level

The corresponding warning is:

"STOP CHECK COOLANT INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL".

If this symbol flashes while driving the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low:

Stop vehicle immediately, stop engine and check level. If necessary, add coolant. The coolant type to be used is described in the "Coolant system" chapter.

If the level is in order the failure may be due to the fan. In this case, check the radiator fan fuse and replace, if necessary.

If the warning lamp does not go out even though the coolant level is correct and the fan fuse is in order, do not drive on. Call in expert assistance.

If the trouble is located only in the radiator fan and the coolant level is in order and temperature warning lamp is off you may drive on to the nearest Technical Service Centre. To make good use of the air stream for cooling purposes, neither allow engine idle nor drive very slowly.

Alternator

The corresponding warning lamp is:

"ALTERNATOR WORKSHOP!"

The warning lamp lights up when switching on the ignition. It must go out once the engine is switched on.

The alternator is driven by a long-life ribbed belt.

If the warning lamp comes on while driving, stop, turn off the engine and check ribbed belt.

If the belt is loose or broken, do not drive since the coolant pump is no longer being driven. The belt must be checked or replaced.

If the warning lamp comes on even though the ribbed belt is not broken or loose, one can proceed normally to the nearest Technical Service Centre.

Since the battery will continue to discharge it is advisable to switch off all unessential electrical consumers.

Never open the bonnet if you see steam or coolant coming from the engine compartment! Risk of scalding. Wait until no more steam or coolant can be seen.

Do not touch fan. Fan could switch on suddenly even if engine is switched off.

WARNING

Please note the following points to avoid scalding with hot coolant:

Exercise caution when opening the coolant expansion tank! When the engine is hot the coolant system is under pressure. Let engine cool down before unscrewing the cap.

To protect your face, hands and arms from steam or hot fluid cover the cap with a large cloth.

Ensure that coolant fluid does not drop on the hot exhaust or any other hot engine component. The antifreeze in the coolant could ignite.

WARNING (continued)

Instrument panel68

Seat belt warning lamp

The corresponding warning lamp is:

"FASTEN SEAT BELT".

This warning lamp (only in some countries) lights up for about 6 seconds when the ignition is switched on as a reminder to fasten your seat belts.

If the seat belt is not fastened an acoustic signal will sound after switching on the ignition which will stop after about 6 seconds or when the seat belt is fastened.

"Seat belts" chapter. K

Priority 2 (yellow symbols)

An acoustic signal will sound if a yellow symbol appears. The symbol is an indication of danger. The function must be checked as soon as possible. If there are several failures at the same time, the symbols will appear consecutively for about 2 seconds.

Insufficient oil level

The corresponding warning lamp is:

"CHECK OIL LEVEL".

If the symbol lights: stop vehicle and switch off engine! Check oil level and, if necessary, add oil "Engine oil" chapter.

Defective oil gauge

The corresponding warning lamp is:

"OIL SENSOR WORKSHOP!"

If the symbol flashes it probably means that the oil level sensor is defective. Head immediately to a Technical Service Centre. You may continue motoring, but you should check the oil level regularly, for instance, every time you stop to fill up.

Engine failure

Petrol engine

Diesel engine

The corresponding warning lamp is:

"ENGINE FAILURE WORKSHOP".

If there was an electrical engine failure while driving the corresponding warning lamp would light up (petrol engine) or flash (diesel engine). The engine must be checked by a Technical Service Centre immediately.

Anti-block system (ABS)*

The corresponding warning sign is:

"ABS FAILURE".

A failure of the ABS system is indicated as follows:

If the ABS warning lamp lights separately you may brake the vehicle with the normal brake system without ABS. Nevertheless, contact a Technical Service Centre as soon as possible.

For more information on the EDS system page 164.

Instrument panel 69

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Electronic immobilizer

The corresponding warning sign is:

"IMMOBILIZER ACTIVE".

When switching the ignition on, the data from the vehicle key is automatically processed. The warning lamp will flash to confirm that the data is being compared.

If a non-authorized key is used the warning lamp will flash permanently. The ignition will not work "Remote control keys" chapter.

Open bonnet/tailgate warning lamp*

The corresponding warning sign is:

"TAILGATE OPEN"

This warning lamp comes on when the tailgate is open.

This warning lamp goes out only if the tailgate is completely closed (to the second catch).

Windscreen washer fluid*

The corresponding warning sign is:

"FILL WASHER WATER"

This symbol lights when the windscreen washer fluid level is too low.

Add water for the windscreen and headlight* washers Washer system chapter.

Low fuel level

The corresponding warning sign is:

"FILL TANK"

Fill tank immediately page 157. K

Instrument panel70

Navigation system* If your vehicle is fitted with a navigation system you may go from one indicator to the next using the windscreen wiper lever (by pressing for more than 2 seconds):

Navigation indicator.

Multi-function indicator.

When the navigation or multi-function system is activated the onboard computer display will most likely show possible failures.

The instructions for the use of the SEAT navigation system is included in a separate supplement. K

6

7

8

1/min x1000

0

20

40

60

30

50

7

Km/h

C

AL0-078

AL0-152 Fig. 57

Fig. 58

Opening and closing 71

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Opening and closing

Keys

Key set

The key set belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:

a remote control key A with a tough sheath,

a fixed key with remote control B ,

one key tab C with the key number.

Plastic key tab

Spare keys cannot be issued without the key number on the key tab C . For this reason:

Always keep the key tab in a safe place.

Never leave the key tab in the vehicle.

If you sell the vehicle, please give the plastic key tab to the new owner.

Duplicate keys

If you need a replacement key, take your key tab to a SEAT dealership.

Fig. 59

Incorrect use of the keys can result in critical injuries.

Never leave children or handicapped persons in the vehicle; in case of emergency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.

Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.

Never leave any of the vehicle keys in the vehicle. Unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.

Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident. The steering lock could engage suddenly, and you would not be able to steer the vehicle.

WARNING

CBA

B7M-1154

Opening and closing72

Note

There are electronic components in the key and remote control. Protect the keys from moisture and excessive vibration. K

Electronic immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons using your vehicle.

A micro-chip is located in the head of the key which automatically deactivates the immobilizer when the key is inserted in the ignition lock.

The system is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off.

Note

The engine can thus only be started with a correctly coded Genuine SEAT key.

Trouble free operation of your vehicle can only be guaranteed when using genuine keys. K

Keys with remote control*

Vehicles with a remote control have two keys, one a folding key, and the other a fixed key fig. 59.

Note

In some model versions the remote control key can be folded. Its functioning, as far as the remote control, is identical to the keys with remote control "Radio-frequency remote control key" chapter. K

Fig. 60LEO-005

Opening and closing 73

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Foldable key*

To unfold the key sword, press button A . It will unfold with a spring.

To fold the key sword, press button A and guide it with your hand until it is completely folded. K

Doors, central locking*

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

When the front doors are locked or unlocked, all the other doors, the tank flap and the tailgate are locked or unlocked by the central locking system.

The central locking system is equipped with an added security mechanism: Once the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the internal door locking levers can immediately be moved freely. In other words they are disengaged from the outside handles. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside. This makes breaking in difficult.

The system may be activated from outside both with the key and the radio-frequency remote control*.

The warning lamp on the drivers door covering will begin to flicker to show that the security system is activated. K

Unlocking

To unlock the vehicle, turn the key in a front door or the tailgate lock to the open position.

Note

When you open the vehicle the inside lights in door contact position will come on for about 20 seconds.

If the central locking should fail, all locks with the exception of the tank flap can be operated normally. (If the car was simply locked, simply turn the key twice in the door locks). Tank flap emergency release page 158.

Fig. 61

A

LEO-006

Opening and closing74

If the key is held at the open position on vehicles with electric windows, all windows will open (with the exception of the electric rear vent wing windows). K

Locking

To lock the vehicle, turn the key to the lock position once in the lock of one of the front doors or in the tailgate. All doors, the tank flap and the tailgate will be locked. The added security mechanism and the anti-theft warning system* will immediately be activated.

Turn the key twice in succession in one of the locks:

All doors, the tank flap and the tailgate will be locked. The added security mechanism and the anti-theft warning system* will not be activated "Anti-theft alarm system" chapter.

On vehicles equipped with electric windows and electric vent wing windows or an electric sliding roof, the sliding roof or windows which have been left open can be automatically closed. To do this, one only needs to hold the key in the lock position until all windows and the sliding roof are completely closed.

Re-locking

The electrical central lock incorporates an automatic door lock function which will lock the vehicle in case you do not open a door or use any lock within 30 seconds from unlocking by remote control.

If the remote control has been activated accidentally this function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked.

Note

Some functional aspects of the vehicle can be programmed according to the clients driving style. For further information, consult the Technical Service. K

If the car was locked with the security system or double lock, turning the key once in the door locks. You will not be able to lock the rear doors from inside or outside, as they do not have key locks.

WARNING

Take great care when closing the windows and the electric roof* from the outside!

If you close from the outside carelessly or without visibility you may cause serious injury especially to children. K

WARNING

Opening and closing 75

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Door release lever

The doors and the tailgate can also be locked with the drivers door release lever. To do this, pull or press the lever in the direction shown (see illustration). However, the added security mechanism, the passenger door and rear door release levers do not affect the other locking areas. These levers only lock or unlock the one door.

The drivers door cannot be locked by pressing the locking knob down as long as the door is open. This is to prevent you from locking yourself out.

The doors can be opened with the release levers. First press the release lever in and then pull to open the door.

If the drivers door is not properly closed (on the catch), it is not possible to lock the vehicle. The drivers door must be opened and then closed again properly. The doors can then be locked.

AL0-001 Fig. 62

If the vehicle is locked using the radio wave remote control* or mechanically operating the key in the lock, while the passenger door is open (drivers door closed), and then you get back in the car and close the door, all doors will be locked and cannot be opened either from the inside or the outside.

No persons especially children should be left in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside, as the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. This applies particularly to vehicles with electric windows, as the windows can also no longer be opened "Electric powered windows" chapter.

When pressing the release lever of the drivers door all other doors, bonnet/tailgate and tank flap lock automatically. When pulling on the release lever all doors, bonnet/tailgate and tank flap open automatically.

As assistance from the outside in the event of an emergency is rendered more difficult once the doors are locked, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle.

Locked doors and tailgate also prevent unwanted access to the car e.g. at traffic lights. K

WARNING

Opening and closing76

Interior light control

The interior light is switched on for approx. 20 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked, a door opened or the ignition key removed. The switch must be in the door contact position for this function.

Once the door is closed, the inside light remains on for another 20 seconds (delayed switch off of inside light).

It is however switched off as soon as the vehicle is locked or the ignition switched on, and whenever all the doors and boot/tailgate are closed.

With the door open, the interior light will remain on for a maximum of ten minutes. This prevents the vehicle battery from discharging.

Once the ignition is off, all inside lights, including reading light, the one on the courtesy mirror and on the door, and the boot light, will remain switched on for a maximum of one hour, to prevent the battery from discharging.

Note

On vehicles without an anti-theft warning system*, the interior light is not switched on when the tailgate is opened. K

Central locking button*

The central locking button makes it possible to lock/unlock the whole vehicle from the inside. The button is located in the door release lever on the drivers door fig. 63.

Locking

By pressing the right hand side of the switch A all doors and the boot lid/tailgate are locked. It is now no longer possible to open the doors or boot lid/tailgate. Unwanted access from outside (e.g. at traffic lights) is also prevented in this way.

If the drivers door is open it will not be locked. This is to prevent you from locking yourself out.

The dead-lock mechanism and anti-theft alarm* are not activated when the button is operated.

Fig. 63

AB

AL0-002

Opening and closing 77

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Unlocking

By pressing the left hand side of the switch B all doors and according to the position of the tailgate lock the tailgate are unlocked.

Note

If the vehicle is locked using the central locking button, it is possible to open the doors separately. To do this, pull the door handle until the door opens.

The button will also function when the ignition is switched off.

Child-proof catch

The rear doors also have child-proof catches which is operated via a lever in the doors. When the lever is moved up (e.g. using the vehicle key fig. 64), the child-proof catch is engaged. The interior lock release is then inoperative and the door can only be opened from outside as long as the door is not locked from the inside with the door release lever "Doors, central locking" chapter. K

Single door opening*

The central locking system can be modified to open only the drivers door, the passenger door or the tailgate without unlocking the other areas.

Technical Service Centres will be happy to provide further details, and/or to activate this possibility.

If the central locking button in the door release lever on the drivers door is operated, all other doors and the tailgate are locked automatically.

However when the doors are locked outside help in an emergency is hindered, and so children should never be left alone in the vehicle.

Locking the doors and tailgate prevents intruders from getting in the vehicle, e.g. at traffic lights.

In vehicles fitted with an Air Bag, and only in crashes where the Air Bag is activated, the central locking system automatically unlocks the doors to enable help from outside. The courtesy light will remain lit until the key is removed from the ignition and is switched on again. K

WARNING

Fig. 64AL0-003

Opening and closing78

Unlocking with the individual opening activated

Turn key in one of the locks once:

The driver and passenger door or bonnet/tailgate are unlocked. The safety lock and anti-theft alarm are deactivated immediately.

If the key is turned once in the drivers door, the tank flap is also unlocked. The dead-lock and anti-theft* warning systems are immediately deactivated.

Turn the key twice in succession in any of the locks:

All doors, the tailgate and the tank flap are unlocked. The dead- lock and anti-theft* warning systems are immediately deactivated.

Note

All the other functions for individual opening of doors can be found in the "Doors, central locking" chapter.

If one of the doors or the tailgate is unlocked and then one of the other doors is opened from the inside with the door release lever, this door will not be locked by the central locking. For this reason, it is recommended that all areas be unlocked by turning the key twice before being locked again. K

Tailgate

Opening and closing

Turn the key to position a to unlock the tailgate and all doors with the central locking. Now simply open the tailgate by pulling the exterior handle.

If the key is held in position a , this will open all of the windows* in cars with electric windows.

Turn the key to position b to lock the tailgate and all doors.

On vehicles equipped with electric windows and electric vent wing windows or an electric sliding roof, the sliding roof or windows which have been left open can be automatically closed. To do this one only needs to hold the key in position b until all windows and the sliding roof are completely closed.

ac

b

AL0-004 Fig. 65

Opening and closing 79

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

If the central locking should happen to fail, the tailgate can be opened manually be turning the key to position c .

Note

To prevent unauthorized access, it is not possible to open the tailgate while the ignition is switched on (for example at traffic lights). This function is retained for about 30 seconds after the ignition is switched off, so long as no doors are opened.

Rear comfort opening*

For increased comfort, when the ignition is switched on it is possible to open the tailgate for about 30 seconds after the last door is locked.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description of anti-theft alarm system*

The anti-theft alarm system must contribute to reducing the attempts to gain access to, or to steal the car. Non-authorized entry to the car will trigger acoustic and optical signals.

The anti-theft alarm system, including the interior monitor*, is switched on automatically when the drivers door, the front passenger door or the boot lid are locked. To do this, the key must be turned once in the direction of lock. The system will be activated immediately. All of the turn signals will flash briefly to indicate its activation.

If you turn the key twice clockwise in the lock the car will be locked but the anti-theft alarm/passenger compartment surveillance* will be switched off.

When the car is closed the alarm system will trigger if:

a door

the bonnet

the tailgate/boot door

are unduly opened , or

the ignition is switched on, or

the surveillance* system detects movement inside the car.

Under such circumstances optical and acoustic signals will be triggered for about 30 seconds. K

After closing the tailgate always pull it upwards to make sure that it is properly closed otherwise it could open suddenly when the vehicle is moving, even though the key has been turned in the lock.

The tailgate must always be fully closed when the vehicle is moving, otherwise exhaust gas will be drawn into the vehicle interior!

Danger of asphyxiation! K

WARNING

Opening and closing80

Switching off the alarm

To switch off the alarm, unlock the car doors.

Note

If once the alarm signals have ended you try to gain access to any other security area (for instance, by opening the tailgate/boot after having opened a door) the alarm signal will be triggered again.

The alarm system can be switched on or off with the radio-frequency* remote control. You will find more details on handling in the "Radio- frequency remote control" chapter.

Passenger compartment surveillance activation*

When switching on the anti-theft alarm system the passenger compartment surveillance is also activated.

If there is any movement in the car interior when the interior monitoring system is activated, the anti-theft alarm will be triggered.

Note

Please bear in mind warnings on page 75.

Sensors

The passenger compartment surveillance sensors are located at the upper part of the pillars between the front and the backseat doors.

In order to avoid interfering with their proper performance you must never cover the sensors.

Note

If the car is parked for long periods, after 14 days the warning led will switch off to avoid the battery being discharged. The alarm system will remain activated.

Interrupting the alarm trigger

To interrupt the triggering of the alarm you must turn the key in the lock clockwise or press the open fig. 68 1 button on the remote control.

Note

l If the alarm has been triggered the driver will notice it because the led on the drivers door will blink in a different way to that of alarm on. K

Fig. 66AL0-081

Opening and closing 81

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Volumetric sensor

This is a surveillance function or a control incorporated in the anti- theft alarm system which detects through ultrasound unauthorized access to the vehicle interior (i.e. through a window). This system has two sensors: a transmitter and a receiver.

Activate

The volumetric sensor is switched on automatically when the anti- theft alarm is activated whether by locking manually with the key or by remote control.

Deactivate

The volumetric sensor is deactivated when unlocking the vehicle manually with the key in the door lock or by radio wave remote control.

Note

A warning lamp in the drivers door will flash if the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor. This flashing is different from that of the activated alarm.

If the volumetric sensor has caused the alarm to set off three times the alarm system will no longer go off.

Other sensors (door opening, luggage compartment, etc.) will continue to set off the alarm. K

Radio-frequency remote control key*

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

You can use the remote control to carry out the following operations without having to use the key:

Opening and closing the central locking.

Switching the anti-theft alarm* and the safety locking system on and off.

Individual opening* of just the drivers door.

Connecting and diconnecting the inside light "Doors, central locking" chapter.

The radio wave emitter with batteries is incorporated into the grip of the car key. The receiver is in the cabin.

Fig. 67AL0-081

Opening and closing82

The effective range (red areas) of the remote control are shown in the fig. 67. The maximum range depends on several factors.

The range is also reduced as the batteries wear down.

Note

Duplicate, unprogrammed keys for the remote control are available at Technical Service Centres. However, the second key must be synchronised in a SEAT Official Service Centre, as the immobiliser code must also be entered into the head of the key.

Up to a maximum of four keys with radio-frequency remote control may be used. K

Opening and closing your vehicle

To open the car, point the key at the car, within the effective range, and briefly press the opening button (arrow 1 ). To close the car, briefly press the closing button (arrow 2 ).

If you press the closing button (arrow 2 ) twice, the safety lock and anti-theft alarm system* are deactivated and the indicators will briefly flash to show this.

Note

While the open or close buttons are pressed, a warning light in the key flashes. If this does not happen, the battery in the key might be flat. In this case a Technical Service Centre should check or change the battery.

When the safety lock and the anti-theft alarm* are activated, proceed in the following manner:

If you open the car with the opening button of the radio-frequency* remote control, all the locks will be blocked automatically if you do not open any of the doors or boot/tailgate before 30 seconds have elapsed. However, the safety lock and the anti-theft alarm* will be deactivated during those 30 seconds. This function stops unwanted opening of the vehicle within the effective range of the radio-frequency* remote control.

When unlocking the vehicle, keep the key in the drivers and passengers door lock or tailgate in the unlocking position. All windows, except for the lateral electric windows, will open automatically.

When keeping the key in the locking position, the windows and the roof will close automatically.

2 1

LEO-009 Fig. 68

Opening and closing 83

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Individual opening of the doors

Opening with the individual opening activated

To open the car, point the key at it within the effective range and briefly press the opening button fig. 68, arrow 1 once:

Only the drivers door is unlocked. The safety lock and the anti- theft alarm* are immediately deactivated, and all the indicators flash to show this.

If you press the opening button fig. 68, arrow 1 twice all the locks are unlocked.

The safety lock and the anti-theft alarm* remain deactivated.

Note

All other individual door opening functions can be found in the "Doors, central locking" chapter. K

Synchronisation

If the vehicle cannot be opened by pressing the radio transmitter button, it could be that the code of the key no longer matches that of the control unit in the vehicle. This can occur if the transmitter button is frequently pressed outside the effective range of the system.

The infrared key must be resynchronized. The synchronization process must be completed with 1 minute.

The necessary steps for the programming of the key are:

1. Insert key into drivers door lock and turn three times forwards (unlock), before 5 seconds have elapsed (maximum). Each time hold it for 1/2 second in the unlock position. Remove key. The warning lamp in the inner drivers door cover will flash to show that the operation has been properly completed.

2. Press and hold close button fig. 68, arrow 2 .

3. Press open button fig. 68, arrow 1 3 times. Release close button. The key has now been recoded. To check the system, the warning lamp in the door trim will flash, and the light in the key will flash 5 times.

If any further infrared keys are being used, they must also be synchronised. To do this, steps 2 to 4 of the synchronisation procedure must be carried out. This procedure must not last any longer than 15 seconds for each key and must be carried out immediately after the synchronisation of the previous key.

To ensure that nobody is injured when closing the windows or sliding/tilting roof, the operator should always watch the windows and sliding/tilting roof as they close.

Careless or uncontrolled closing of the windows can cause injuries. K

WARNING

Opening and closing84

Note

The remote control key may only be synchronised when the electric windows have been closed.

Every time a key is synchronised all previous information is deleted, which means that if you wish to use several remote control keys for the same car, you must synchronise them during this this operation. K

User License

The radio-frequency remote control complies with all approval standards and its use has been authorised by the Federal Approvals Office For Telecommunications Of the Federal Republic Of Germany.

All components are marked in accordance with current standards.

This license is the base for obtaining licenses in other countries. K

Electric windows*

The controls are in the armrest of the drivers door fig. 69.

1 Passenger door

2 Drivers door

3 Safety control*

4 Right rear door*

5 Left rear door*

In the passenger door and the rear doors there are also additional switches* for the separate windows.

With the safety switch 3 in the drivers door, the rear electric windows can be deactivated.

1

2

3

4

5

AL0-005 Fig. 69

Opening and closing 85

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Safety switch out1):

The switches in the rear doors can be used.

Safety switch in1):

The switches in the rear doors cannot be used.

Electric windows with an automatic closing function* are equipped with a power limiter.

The windows stop closing automatically should anything block it. However this power limiter function does not work when the windows are closed from outside with the ignition key.

Function of electric windows with ignition on

Opening

Press and briefly hold the front edge of the respective button and the window will open fully (automatic window opening).

If the switch is pressed again, the window will stop immediately

Closing windows with automatic closing function* (driver door only)

Lift completely the front edge of the respective button (driver door only) and the window will close fully (automatic window closing)2).

If the switch is pressed again, the window will stop immediately.

To open the window, the switch must be operated until the desired position has been reached.

The roll-back function*

1. If the window in the driver or passengers door is hindered whilst closing through stiffness or by an obstacle (roll-back function), the window will open again immediately.

2. After the window has opened, you must lift and hold the appropriate switch for the affected window again within 5 seconds. If the window is still hindered whilst closing through stiffness or by an obstacle, the window will stop closing.

1) Depending on the model version the function may be reversed.

2) This function can only be operated by the controls in the drivers door.

Always remove the ignition key when leaving the vehicle even if only for a short time. Never leave children alone in the vehicle.

The electric windows are only deactivated when the drivers or passenger doors are opened.

Watch out when closing the windows! Careless or uncontrolled closing of the windows can cause injuries.

The driver must warn the other occupants of the risk which careless operation of electric windows entails.

No one should remain in the vehicle when locked from the outside, as the windows cannot be opened in the event of an emergency.

Take great care when closing the windows and the electric roof* from the outside!

Careless closing from the outside or without visibility can cause serious injury, especially to children. K

WARNING

Opening and closing86

3. After the window has stopped, you must lift and hold the switch again within 5 seconds in order to close the window.

The window will now close without power limitation.

Note

If you wait for longer than 5 seconds between the individual steps, the window will open again on switch operation.

Closing the windows without automatic closing function*

Lift the switch by the front edge until the window is completely closed.

Please note that the window closes without power limitation.

Function of the electric windows with ignition switched off

After the ignition has been switched of, the windows can still be operated for about ten minutes so long as the driver or passenger doors are not opened.

The windows can also be closed or opened from outside on vehicles equipped with central locking. In vehicles with a sliding/tilting sunroof, this can only be closed. To do this the key should be held in the locking or unlocking position in the lock of the driver or passenger door. The windows are closed first, followed by the sliding sunroof.

Opening

Press the front edge of the respective button.

Closing

Lift the front edge of the respective button.

Take great care when closing the windows! Closing the windows in a careless or uncontrolled manner may cause bruises, especially in children.

The driver must warn the other occupants of the risk which careless operation of electric windows entails.

WARNING

Take great care when closing the windows! Closing the windows in a careless or uncontrolled manner may cause bruises, especially in children.

The driver must warn the other occupants of the risk which careless operation of electric windows entails. K

WARNING

Opening and closing 87

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Note

If the window in the driver or passenger door is hindered whilst closing through stiffness or by an obstacle (roll-back function), the window will open again immediately.

In this case you can only close the window again after the ignition has been switched on. K

Notes

The automatic opening/closing function* on the driver and passenger door windows will not function after the vehicle battery has been disconnected/reconnected.

To reinstall this function after reconnecting the battery, please note the following points.

Lock vehicle from the outside via the drivers or passenger door. When doing this please ensure that all doors and windows are closed completely.

Lock the vehicle again via the drivers or passenger door. Hold the key in the locking position for at least one second.

The automatic closing function* on the drivers and passenger side has been reactivated.

Vent wing*

Mechanically operated vent wing windows

Be very careful when closing the electric windows and roof from the outside!

Be very careful when closing the windows! Closing from the outside without visibility or in a careless manner can cause serious injury, especially with children.

Children should never remain alone inside the vehicle when it is locked from the outside, as outside help will be hindered in the event of an emergency.K

WARNING

AL0-082 Fig. 70

Opening and closing88

Opening

Pull locking arm in direction of arrow and push outwards until the lever catches.

Closing

Pull locking arm forwards, then inwards until the lever catches. K

Electrically operated vent wing windows*

The windows only work with the ignition switched on.

Opening

Press the upper surface of the respective switch to open the desired window.

Closing

Pull upper surface of the respective switch to close the desired window.

Note

The windows on vehicles with central locking can also be closed from the outside. For this purpose, the key must be in the lock of the drivers or passenger doors or the tailgate and held in the locking position. K

AL0-006 Fig. 71

Be careful when closing the window!

Careless or uncontrolled closing of the windows can cause injuries.

Therefore when leaving the vehicle, always take the ignition key with you.

WARNING

Opening and closing 89

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Sliding/tilting roof*

Opening and closing the opening roof

With ignition switched on, the roof can be opened and closed with the switch.

To open

Press switch 1 .

To close

Press switch 2 .

To tilt

Press button 3 .

To lower

Press switch 2 .

Note

If the roof is open and should be tilted, press button 3 and hold until the function is complete.

If the roof should be opened directly from the tilted position, press button 1 and hold until the function is complete.

When tilting the glass roof, the screen to prevent intensive sunlight shining in will also open automatically with the roof. If required it can be closed by hand when the roof is closed.

On vehicles, the roof* can also be closed with central locking by holding the key in the lock position when locking the vehicle. K

Fig. 72

1

3

2 B7M-0020

Care should be taken when closing the roof! Careless or uncontrolled closing of the roof could cause injuries. Therefore, when leaving the vehicle always take the ignition key with you.

WARNING

Opening and closing90

Emergency operation If the system should develop a fault the roof can also be closed by hand.

Remove interior light by inserting flat blade of screwdriver on the right-hand side between the light and the headlining and turning the screwdriver.

Change screwdriver blade round and take out the two Phillips screws (arrow 1 ).

Move cover in direction shown by arrow 2 and remove.

Turn cover of crank opening A in the direction of the arrow.

Pull crank out of retainer, insert it in the opening and close sliding roof.

Replace crank in retainer, and fit cover A over crank opening.

Replace cover and interior light. K

A

AL0-085

1

2

AL0-084 Fig. 73

Fig. 74

Lights and visibility 91

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Lights and visibility

Switches

Switching lights on and off

Lighting switch 1

Switched off

Side lights1)

Dipped or main beam

The headlights only work when the ignition is on. When the engine is being started and after ignition has been switched off, the headlights are automatically switched to side lights.

Dipping and flashing the headlights "Indicators and dipped beam lever" chapter.

Note

If lights are not switched off and the ignition key is removed, a buzzer* will sound when the drivers door is open.

Front fog lights*

With lighting switch in side light or dipped/main beam position pull switch out to first detent.

Rear fog light*

Vehicles without fog lights

Turn lighting switch to dipped/main beam position and pull switch out to stop.

Vehicles with fog lights

With lighting switch in dipped/main beam position, pull switch out to 2nd detent.

0

Fig. 75

1) In some countries, when the side lights are switched on with the ignition on, the dipped headlights also come on with reduced intensity.

1 2 3

AL0-018

Lights and visibility92

Note

A warning lamp in the instrument panel lights up when the rear fog light is switched on.

Due to the amount of dazzle it causes, the rear fog light should only be switched on when the visibility is very poor (e.g. in some E.U. countries, 50 metres).

The electrical system of the factory fitted tow bar* is wired up so that when towing a trailer fitted with rear fog lights, the rear fog light on the towing vehicle are automatically switched off. K

Coming Home/Leaving Home function

After dark the area around the car is lit up with the aid of the coming home / leaving home function.

To activate the function

This function can be activated, using the light switch, for 2 minutes after the dipped headlights are switched off. This is done as follows:

Switch off the ignition with the doors closed.

Move the indicator lever briefly in the direction of the steering wheel (headlight flasher).

Unlock the driver's door At his point the function is activated.

Operation of the Coming Home/Leaving Home function

When the drivers door is opened, the dipped front headlights will be switched on automatically for approximately 3 minutes.

If the drivers door is closed during these 3 minutes, the dipped headlights will remain lit for approximately 30 seconds.

Switching on the vehicle ignition during the activation period will switch off the dipped headlights. K

Instrument lighting/Headlight range control*

Instrument lighting 2

When the lights are on, the level of the instrument lighting can be set to any intensity by turning the knurled wheel next to the light switch.

Headlight range control 3

With the electrical range control the headlight settings can be matched exactly to the load condition of vehicle. This prevents

Fig. 76

1 2 3

AL0-018

Lights and visibility 93

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

oncoming traffic from being dazzled more than is unavoidable. At the same time the correct headlight beam setting provides the best possible visibility for the driver.

The headlights can only be regulated with the dipped headlights switched on.

To lower the beams, turn knurled disc from the basic position () downwards. K

Switches in the central console

Rear window heating 1

The heating will only function when the ignition is turned on.

On vehicles without windscreen heating*, the heating is turned on/off using this switch. A warning lamp will light up in the switch when the heating is on.

On vehicles with electrically adjustable exterior mirrors the mirrors are heated as long as the rear window heating is switched on.

On vehicles with windscreen heating, the heating is switched on with a button.

The rear window heating automatically switches off about 20 minutes after it is switched on. It can also be switched off earlier by pressing the button again.

If the heating is still required, simply press the button again. It will again be switched off automatically after a further 20 minutes.

On vehicles with electrically adjustable exterior mirrors the mirrors are heated as long as the rear window heating is switched on.

For the sake of the environment

As soon as window is clear, switch element off. The reduced current consumption helps to reduce fuel consumption "Economic and environment friendly driving" chapter. K

Fig. 77

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 ESP

2

PDC

1

AL0-087

Lights and visibility94

Windscreen heating* 2

The windscreen heating works only when the engine is running. When it is on a warning lamp in the switch lights up.

The windscreen heating automatically switches off about 10 minutes after it is switched on. It can also be switched off earlier by pressing the button again.

If the heating is still required, press the switch again. The switch will again switch off after about 10 minutes.

Note

For technical reasons, the blower of the passenger compartment heater is switched off when the windscreen heating is switched on. K

Knurled wheel for seat heating* 3 / 7

The cushion and backrest of the front seats can be heated electrically when the ignition is on.

The heating is switched on and regulated with the knurled wheel.

To switch heating off, turn knurled wheel to the basic position (0). K

Anti-skidding system of the drive wheels (TCS). Electronic Stability Program (ESP)* 4

The TCS or ESP connect automatically when the engine is switched on. If necessary, they may be switched off briefly by pressing corresponding switch.

If it is connected a warning lamp will light "Warning lamps" chapter.

For further information pages 164 to 166. K

Hazard warning lamps 5

The system also works when the ignition is switched off.

Switch on the hazard warning lamps if, for example:

Your vehicle stops because of a technical defect,

You have an emergency

You reach the tail end of a traffic jam.

Fig. 78

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 ESP

2

PDC

1

AL0-087

Lights and visibility 95

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

When the hazard warning lamps are switched on, all four signal lights flash simultaneously. The warning lamps for the indicators and a warning lamp in the switch will also flash.

Note legal requirements when employing such safety measures. K

Parking distance control (PDC)* 6

This system helps prevent small bumps which may occur while parking, especially in city traffic when parking between other cars.

If the appropriate switch (PDC) in the centre console is pressed, the sensors in the vehicles bumper warn the driver of the proximity of objects with an intermittent beep and a warning lamp. This warning occurs when the distance between vehicle and obstacle is 40cm. The beep speeds up until it becomes continuous, when the distance is approximately 20cm. K

Free space for additional switch 8

fig. 78 K

Sun visors

The sun visors can be pulled out of the side mountings and swung towards the doors.

The illuminated* make-up mirror is switched on when the cover is opened. K

Fig. 79AL0-088

Lights and visibility96

Lights

Indicators and dipped beam lever

The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on.

Right turn signals lever up 1

Left turn signals lever down 2

When turn signals are working, the warning lamp flashes as well "Warning lamps" chapter.

The turn signals switch off automatically when the steering wheel returns to its normal position.

To signal a lane change

Move the lever up 1 or down 2 to the pressure point and hold in this position the warning lamp should flash at the same time.

Headlight flasher

Pull the lever towards the steering wheel 3 the main beam warning lamp will light up.

Short or long beams

With the long or short beam connected push the lever towards the steering wheel 4 . When main beam is on, the main beam warning lamp will light up.

Parking lights*

The parking lights only work when ignition is switched off.

Right parking lights lever up 1

Left parking lights lever down 2

If the ignition key has been removed, a buzzer* will sound when the drivers door is open.

Note

The use of the signals and lighting described here is subject to local regulations. K

1

2

4

3

TO8-016A Fig. 80

Lights and visibility 97

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Interior lights

Front interior light A

Vehicles with sliding roof:

Switch pressed on left light permanently on

Switch in centre position controlled by door contacts

Switch pressed on right light off

Interior lights with time delayed switch off* remain on for about 12 seconds after doors are closed. If the ignition is switched on during this period, these interior lights go out immediately.

Vehicles without sliding roof:

Switch pressed on right light permanently on

Switch in centre position light off

Switch pressed on left controlled by door contacts

Interior lights with time delayed switch off* remain on for about 20 seconds after doors are closed. If the ignition is switched on during this period, these interior lights go out immediately. K

Front reading light* B

Vehicles with sliding roof:

Switch pressed on left light off

Switch pressed on right light on

Vehicles without sliding roof:

Switch pressed on left light on

Switch pressed on right light off K

Fig. 81

AB B7M-0017

Lights and visibility98

Interior light

Interior light permanently switched off

In switch position 1 , the interior and reading lights are switched off.

Switching on the reading light

Turn the switch to position 2 (left reading light) or to position 4

(right reading light).

Door light position

Turn the switch to position 3 . The interior lights are automatically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the ignition lock. The light turns off about 20 seconds after the closure of the doors. The interior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.

Interior lights or both reading lights switched on

Turn the control to position 5 . K

Lights next to the roof handle*

To turn on press the glass of the light on the lower edge.

To turn off press the light in the opposite direction. K

Luggage compartment light

The light comes on when tailgate is opened (even when lighting and ignition is switched off). It is therefore essential to ensure that the tailgate is always closed when vehicle is parked. K

AL0-024

C

3

1

2

5

4

Fig. 82

Fig. 83

Lights and visibility 99

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Windscreen washers

Front windscreen wipers

Wipers and washers only work when ignition is switched on.

Caution

When it is freezing, check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass before switching the wipers on for the first time.

The heated windscreen washer jets* are switched on when the ignition is switched on and the amount of heat is regulated automatically according to the outside temperature

Note

Topping up washer fluid "Windscreen washer" chapter.

Changing windscreen wiper blades "Windscreen wiper blades" chapter.

Windscreen

Windscreen wipers off

Lever at position 0 .

Intermittent wipe

Lever at position 1 .

Use lever A to change the intervals of the intermittent wipe. Four levels are available.

Lever to the right brief intervals

Lever to the right long intervals

The intervals of each level are determined by the speed of the vehicle.

Wiper slow

Lever at position 2 .

Wiper fast

Lever at position 3 .

Flick wipe

Lever at position 4 .

Fig. 84

A

0

1

2

3

45

LEO-027

The windscreen wipers must be in very good condition to ensure clear visibility "Windscreen wiper blades" chapter.

WARNING

Lights and visibility100

Automatic wash/wipe facility

To turn on wipers and washer, pull lever towards steering wheel to position 5 .

Release lever The washer stops and the wipers carry on for about 4 seconds. K

Rain sensor*

If the vehicle is fitted with a rain sensor and the intermittent wipe is activated this sensor is in charge of adjusting automatically the duration of the intervals to the amount of rain.

Position A of the lever for the windscreen wipers is used to individually adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

After switching off the ignition, the rain sensor needs to be switched on again. To do that the intermittent wipe needs to be switched off and switched on again. K

Rear windscreen

Intermittent wipe

Turn on:

Push lever to position 6 .

The wipers wipe approximately every 6 seconds.

Turn off:

Move the lever towards the steering wheel. If you turn off the windscreen wiper while wiping, the windscreen wiper will function until the wipe is completed.

7

6

LEO-012 Fig. 85

Automatic wash/wipe facility

Turn on:

Push the lever forward to position 7 fig. 85.

The washer/wipe facility keeps working intermittently. To turn off completely move the lever towards the steering wheel. K

Headlight washer system*

When the main or dipped beam is on, the lenses are washed every time the windscreen is washed.

At regular intervals, such as when filling the tank, the dirt on the lenses (insects) should be removed. K

Windscreen wiper blades

Observations

Caution

When it is freezing, check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass before switching the wipers on for the first time.

If the wiper blades drag, it may be caused by various things:

If the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, residual wax may be left on the windscreen.

Filling the windscreen washer container with a window cleaner containing a wax remover can cure the problem.

Damaged wiper blades can lead to dragging. In this case the blades should be renewed.

The blades are set at an incorrect angle.

Have the angle checked and, if necessary, adjusted by a Technical Service Centre. K

Lights and visibility 101

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

For clear vision, it is imperative that the windscreen wiper blades are in good condition.

In order to prevent streaks on the windscreen, you should clean the windscreen wiper blades regularly with a window cleaner. If the windows are particularly dirty, e.g. insect remains, a sponge or cloth should be used to clean the blades.

Change the wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons. Wiper blades may be purchased from Technical Service Centres.

WARNING

Lights and visibility102

Changing wiper blades

Lift the wiper arm up and rotate it so that the blade is perpendicular to the wiper. Next, remove it in the direction of the arrow and replace. K

Rear-view mirrors

Adjusting mirrors

Mirrors should be adjusted before beginning a journey in order to guarantee good visibility. K

Anti-dazzle interior mirror

The lever on the lower edge of the mirror should be pointing to the rear when the basic setting is made.

To set the anti-dazzle position, pull lever forwards.

Exterior mirrors controlled mechanically from inside are adjusted with the knob in the door trim panel. K

Automatic* anti-dazzle mirror

Adjust interior mirror by hand.

If the ignition is switched on the interior mirror automatically darkens depending on the light from behind (i.e. a headlight).

When you engage the reverse gear or put the selector lever on R the mirror returns to its original position (is no longer dark). K

AL0-155 Fig. 86

Lights and visibility 103

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Electrically adjustable mirrors

Electrically adjustable mirrors are set by pressing the edge of the knob A in the drivers door trim.

The surface of the mirror may be angled upwards, downwards, to the left or the right, as required.

With swivel knob A select the driver or passenger wing mirrors.

0 Neutral position

L Drivers mirror

R Passengers mirror

When you adjust the left mirror the right one moves in time, and a separate adjustment of the right mirror should not normally be necessary. If you wish to adjust it separately, activate the right mirror. You should now be able to adjust it.

If the electric adjustment fails, the mirrors can be adjusted manually by pressing on the surface. K

Setting the outside mirrors

Automatic anti-dazzle mirror*

When the ignition is on the mirrors darken automatically according to the amount of light reflecting from behind (e.g.: a flood light).

When shifting into reverse gear or placing the selector lever in R, the mirrors will return to the original position (they are not dark anymore).

Note for vehicles with convex or aspherical outside mirrors*

Convex (curved outwards) mirrors enlarge the field of view but they make objects look smaller. These mirrors are only of limited use in estimating how far away a following vehicle is.

Aspherical exterior mirrors have a mirror surface with different curvature. This wide-angle mirror increases the area of vision even more so than conventional convex mirrors. Their usefulness is also limited when judging the distance to vehicles approaching from behind. K

Fig. 87

A

AL0-007

Lights and visibility104

Mirror heating

The electrically operated outside mirrors are heated as long as the heated rear window is switched on. The ignition must be switched on for this purpose. K

Electric folding wing mirrors

Use control A to select the passenger or drivers wing mirror, or the fold-away function, as well as mirror adjustment fig. 88.

0 Neutral position

L Passengers wing mirror

R Drivers wing mirror

Folding away of wing mirrors

The fold-away position is recommended, for example, when parking or driving in cramped conditions.

To fold away the wing mirrors, starting from positions L, R or 0, select positions with control A .

To unfold the wing mirrors (use position), do the opposite, from to L, R or 0.

Note

Before putting the vehicle through an automatic washing plant, the mirrors should be folded in to prevent them becoming damaged.

If the mirror housing is moved by an external force (e.g. knocked when manoeuvring) the mirrors must be folded right in electrically. Under no circumstances must the mirror housing be adjusted by hand as the operation of the mirror might be affected. To place the mirrors in use position, using control A , they will not work for about 15 seconds.

Be careful not to damage the mirrors when using control A . KA

L

O

R

AL0-090 Fig. 88

Seats and luggage compartment 105

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Seats and luggage compartment

Front seats

The importance of correct seat adjustment

The correct adjustment of the seats is important for:

reaching the controls safely and quickly

relaxed low-fatigue body position

maximum protection from the seat belts and the Air Bag system.

Note

Please adjust your seat as detailed on the next two pages. K

Drivers seat

We recommend that you position the drivers seat as follows:

Set the drivers seat forwards/backwards in such a way that the pedals can be fully depressed with a slightly angled leg.

Set the backrest in such a way that it is fully against your back and that you can reach the upper point of the steering wheel with your arms at a slight angle.

Front passenger seat

We recommend that you position the front passenger seat as follows:

Backrest in an upright position.

Place the feet in the footwell in a comfortable position.

At the same time push the seat back as far as possible. K

For this reason, the front seats should not be pushed too close to the steering wheel or the instrument panel.

Feet should remain in the footwell when the vehicle is moving never resting on the instrument panel or seats.

WARNING No items should be kept in the footwell, as these could block the pedals in the case of a sudden braking manoeuvre.

You would no longer be able to brake, change gear or accelerate! K

WARNING

Seats and luggage compartment106

Seat adjustments

The fig. 89 shows the drivers seat. The control elements on the passenger seat are laid out in a mirror image.

To move seat backwards and forwards 1

Lift lever and move seat. Then release lever and move seat further so that the catch engages.

Adjusting backrest 2

Take weight off backrest and turn knob.

Adjusting lumbar support* 3

By turning the hand-wheel the seat padding in the lumbar area of the spine can be made to arch forward slightly. This gives effective support to the natural curvature of the spine so that the sitting position is less fatiguing, particularly on long trips.

Rotary adjustment* 4

Pull lever up and turn seat towards the door.

Before turning you must first lower the seat to the lowest position and push the seat right back.

On the drivers seat the backrest must also be folded forward, so that it does not hit the steering wheel whilst the seat is being turned.

Fig. 89

For safety reasons the drivers seat must only be moved backwards or forwards when the vehicle is stationary.

WARNING

Do not lower the backrest too far when on the move because the seat belts are then no longer fully effective.

WARNING

Before rotating the drivers seat the handbrake must be fully applied or the vehicle must be fully prevented from rolling by some other method (e.g. gear engaged).

When the vehicle is moving the seats must be facing forwards and properly secured.

WARNING

1

5

2

4

3

B7M-1153

Seats and luggage compartment 107

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Adjusting seat height* 5

Take weight off seat cushion and pull up lever. The whole seat cushion moves upwards. To adjust the seat cushion downwards, push seat downwards with body weight fig. 89.

Coat hanger

You can remove the clothes hook fitted to the head restraint. To do this you must first remove the head restraint "Headrestraints"

chapter. You can then simply pull the hook off the rods of the head restraint.

Toy bag

The toy bag, which is in the form of a rucksack, can be hung from the head restraint of a seat. In this way, your child can always see and reach his/her toys during the journey. It is thus also possible to prevent the bag from being flung forwards if you have to brake suddenly or are involved in an accident. K

Fig. 90

Fig. 91

For safety reasons the height of the drivers seat must only be adjusted when the vehicle is stationary.

Be careful when adjusting the seat height! Careless and uncontrolled adjustment can cause injuries. K

WARNING

B7M-1152

The clothes hook must not be fitted to the head restraint of an integrated child seat. K

WARNING

AL0-091

Seats and luggage compartment108

Armrests

Adjusting armrests

The armrests on the front seats can be hinged up if they are not required.

The angle of the armrests can be adjusted as required with a knurled knob, underneath the armrest. K

Removable armrests*

Take hold of the armrest at the side to the rear and press the button in the direction of the arrow.

Pull the armrest with the button pressed to the side away from the retainer.

When installing, the armrest must engage securely in the retainer. K

AL0-092

AL0-012 Fig. 92

Fig. 93

Seats and luggage compartment 109

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Transport container for removable armrests*

On vehicles with Highline equipment* (7 seater version), the removable armrests from the second row of seats are in a transport container.

The container is hung on the head restraint of a seat in the last row of seats or (on vehicles with 4 integrated child seats) on the middle seat of the second row of seats.

Seats in passenger compartment

To move seat backwards and forwards

Lift lever and move seat. Then release lever and move seat further so that the catch engages.

Fig. 94

Fig. 95

AL0-093

After the initial trip, the transport container should be removed in order to avoid pressure points on the seat.

The container should not be left unsecured in the vehicle. It is recommended to leave the container at home.

If you want to leave the container in the vehicle, it must not be secured on the head restraint of an integrated child seat. K

WARNING The seats in the last row of seats may, for safety reasons, only be used once the luggage compartment cover* has been removed. K

WARNING

AL0-094

Seats and luggage compartment110

Folding backrest forwards

To fold backrest down, pull the locking knob on the side upwards or on the back of the seat fig. 96 downwards.

To fully lower the backrest it is necessary to remove the shelf first "Stowage compartment/boot-lid" chapter.

The backrest is locked when folded down. To lift it up the locking knob must therefore be pulled/pressed again.

Folding seat forwards

First tip the backrest forward. Then pull the locking lever upwards fig. 96 or pull the strap on the back of the seat forwards.

AL0-095 AL0-096Fig. 96 Fig. 97

For safety reasons the back rest must always be latched vertically when the vehicle is in motion and somebody is sitting either next to or behind this seat. K

WARNING

For safety reasons the seat should not be folded forwards when the vehicle is in motion. It must be folded back and securely fixed to the floor anchorages if somebody is sitting either next to or behind this seat. K

WARNING

Seats and luggage compartment 111

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Folding seat back

Fold the complete seat back and allow to engage fully in the floor anchorages.

Note

Check that the seat is securely anchored by pulling it upwards.

Fold seat backrest forwards. K

Seat arrangement

Fig. 98

Exercise caution when folding the seat forwards. Careless or uncontrolled folding of the seat can cause injuries.

WARNING

1 4

52

3

AL0-097

Seats and luggage compartment112

The fig. 98 shows the maximum number of seats fitted to a Alhambra.

1 Second row left seat.

2 Third row left seat.

3 Second row middle seat.

4 Second row right seat.

5 Third row right seat.

Note

Seats 1 and 2 are of the same construction and thus interchangeable.

Seats 4 and 5 are of the same construction and thus interchangeable.

Seats 1 , 2 , 4 and 5 can be put in the place of seat 3 . K

Removing seat

Remove head restraints "Head restraints" chapter.

Move the seat fully back.

Fold the backrest forward.

Fold the complete seat forward.

Squeeze the two bars under the seat together (arrows), hold and remove seat upwards. K

Installing seat

The seat can be installed in a different location fig. 98

In the middle row, the seat can also be installed facing the rear of the vehicle. Here it should be noted that the seat cannot be installed in the outer floor mounting points. You must use the next anchorages.

AL0-098 Fig. 99

Fig. 100

A

B

AL0-099

Seats and luggage compartment 113

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Squeeze the two bars under the seat together arrows, fig 100 and hold.

Position the seat frame fig 100 A between the retaining pins fig 100 B in the floor mounting points and release the two bars.

Pull firmly up on the seat to check that the front seat anchorages are engaged properly.

Fold the seat back until it engages in the rear floor anchorages.

Fold the backrest back.

Vehicles with 6 seats: seat 2 has a lap belt and can be fitted in the position of seat 3 . If the vehicle has a three-point seat belt for seat 3 , seat 5 can be fitted in the position of seat 3 . To do this, the armrests of seats 1 , 2 and 4 should be removed page 108.

The waist seatbelt for seat 2 can only be used if it is placed in the position of seat 3 . K

If the seat is installed in the same or a different position, the following points should be noted with regard to occupant safety:

The seats must always be engaged securely in their anchorages so that they cannot come loose in case of hard braking or in an accident.

The belt lock of the installed seat must be compatible with the seat belt in the vehicle. The seat occupant must be able to apply the belt properly page 12.

When the vehicle is moving nobody should be seated in rearward facing seats as the seat belt for these seats cannot then be applied properly. The only exception to this rule is:

Exception: Small children seated in an integrated child seat with a harness belt may travel in rearward facing seats.

Similarly, when the vehicle is in motion, nobody should travel outside the seating area. All occupants should be correctly belted in.

WARNING

Seats and luggage compartment114

The diversity of the Alhambra On the following pages you can see the diverse ways in which an Alhambra can be used.

The fig. 101 shows how you can increase the luggage compartment by folding forward the seats in the last row of seats.

This increased stowage area can be achieved by simply removing the rear two seats and folding forward the middle row of seats fig. 102.

If you are transporting luggage or other items in the luggage compartment, they must be secured to the lashing eyes "Boot" chapter, so that they are not thrown forward when the brake pedal is depressed.

WARNING

Fig. 101AL0-100

Fig. 102AL0-101

Seats and luggage compartment 115

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

If you want to go on holiday with five people and a lot of luggage, simply remove the rear two seats fig. 103.

After you have rotated* the driver and passenger seat through 180, you can also use your Alhambra as a mobile conference room or as a breakfast room fig. 104.

Fig. 103AL0-102

Fig. 104AL0-103

Seats and luggage compartment116

If you are planning to cycle during your vacation, you can transport your bicycle inside the Alhambra, in this way protecting it from theft and inclement weather. Technical Service Centres carry the corresponding supports fig. 105.

A surfer can quite easily take his or her equipment with them. You dont need to mount a roof rack on the vehicle and can thus save fuel fig. 106. K

Fig. 105AL0-104

Fig. 106AL0-105

Seats and luggage compartment 117

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Head restraints

Correct adjustment of head restraints

The height and angle of the head restraints are adjustable and should be set to suit the height of the occupant. In combination with the seat belts, the head restraints offer effective protection, provided they are properly adjusted.

Adjusting height

Grip sides of head restraint with both hands and pull up or push down.

The best protection is obtained when the upper edge of restraint is at least at eye level. K

Removing and installing

To remove, pull restraints up to the stop, press button (arrow) and at the same time take restraints out.

To remove the rear head restraint first pull the backrest forwards a little.

To install again, push the restraint rods into the guides until they are heard to engage. You do not need to press the key.

Note

With the integrated child seat it is possible to remove and turn around the head restraints for increased comfort of the child. K

B7M-1151 Fig. 107

Fig. 108B7M-1150

Seats and luggage compartment118

Heated seats*

Seat heating* for left seat 3

The cushion and backrest of the front seats can be heated electrically when the ignition is on.

The heating is switched on and regulated to your comfort with the knurled wheel.

To switch heating off, turn knurled wheel to the basic position (0).

Seat heating* for right seat 7

The cushion and backrest of the front seats can be heated electrically when the ignition is on.

The heating is switched on and regulated to your comfort with the knurled wheel.

To switch heating off, turn knurled wheel to the basic position (0). K

Adjustable steering column*

Adjusting the steering wheel position

The steering column can be adjusted at will both for reach and for height. Press the lever A beneath the steering column down and move the steering wheel to the desired position. Then press the lever firmly up again.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 ESP

2

PDC

1

AL0-087 Fig. 109

Fig. 110

A

AL0-017

Seats and luggage compartment 119

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Pedal area

Pedals

The movement of the pedals must not be restricted!

For this reason, do not locate any items in the footwell which could roll or slide underneath the pedals.

Around the pedal area there should not be any foot mats or other additional floor covering materials:

In the case of defects on the brake system, a greater pedal travel may be necessary.

It should always be possible to depress the clutch and accelerator pedals fully.

All pedals must be able to return, unhindered, to their rest positions.

For these reasons, the only foot mats which may be used are those which leave the pedal area completely free and which are prevented from slipping.

Luggage compartment/Mesh partition*

Mesh partition*

The mesh partition behind the last row of seats can be used to store light articles of luggage. The net prevents these articles from

Fig. 111

The steering column may only be adjusted whilst the vehicle stationary.

For safety reasons, the lever must always be firmly pressed up, so that the position of the steering column does not suddenly change whilst the vehicle is in motion. K

WARNING

No items should be kept in the footwell as these could block the pedals in the case of a sudden braking manoeuvre or accident.

You would not longer be able to brake, change gear or accelerate. K

WARNING

AL0-107

Seats and luggage compartment120

being thrown forward when brakes are applied suddenly or in an accident.

The mesh partition can be removed. To do this you must first remove the securing hooks (see arrows).

In the interests of good handling ensure that the load (persons and luggage) is distributed evenly. Heavy items should always be carried as near to the rear axle as possible or better still, between the axles.

You must ensure that the heating elements of the rear window are not destroyed by items rubbing against them.

Stale air escapes through ventilation openings in the side trim of the luggage compartment.

Therefore these openings must not be covered. K

Lashing eyes*

The retaining bar for the detachable seat belts in the 3rd row of seats (see arrow) and the floor seat anchorages can also be used as lashing eyes for securing pieces of luggage.

The lashing eyes comply with the Standard DIN 75410. K

Luggage compartment cover*

The cover can be used as a stowage area for articles of clothing.

Note

Please note that the field of vision of the rear view mirror can be obstructed by articles of clothing.

Furthermore the heating elements of the rear windscreen could be damaged by articles rubbing against them.

If large items of luggage are to be carried, the cover can be removed. K

B7M-046C Fig. 112

For safety reasons, the seats in the rear may only be used once the luggage compartment cover has been removed.

No heavy or hard articles should be left on the luggage compartment cover. They are not only a danger during a sudden braking manoeuvre but could also damage the cover.

WARNING

Seats and luggage compartment 121

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Removing luggage compartment cover Pull luggage compartment cover back to the rear (arrow 1 ), hold and at the same time unhook from the side retainers by moving the cover upwards (arrow 2 ).

Guide the cover forwards by hand do not allow to snap closed!

Press the unlocking button in the direction shown 3 and remove the luggage compartment cover upwards from the right-hand retainer. K

Installing luggage compartment cover

Press the luggage compartment cover from above into the left attachment point and then into the right attachment point, until it engages and a click is heard.

Roll the cover out to the rear and engage in the rear side retainers. K

Fig. 113

Fig. 114

Fig. 115

3

AL0-110

1

2

AL0-109

AL0-111

Seats and luggage compartment122

Roof rack/Roof railing*

Description

When loads are to be carried on the roof, the following should be noted:

As the rain channels are moulded into the roof for streamlining reasons, the normal type of roof rack cannot be used. To avoid risks we advise that only the cross bars provided by the factory are used.

These cross bars are the basis for a complete roof load carrying system. For safety reasons when carrying luggage, bicycles, surfboards, skis and boats, the appropriate special adapters are required.

Any damage which may occur to the vehicle as a result of using other roof load carrying systems or by incorrect fitting will not be covered by the Warranty.

The roof load carrying system must be secured exactly as described in the instructions supplied.

On vehicles with roof rails, the base carriers can be attached to the rail. The distance between the carriers should however be matched to the articles to be transported. Also, on vehicles with a sliding/tilting roof* the front carrier should not be attached in the region of the rear edge of the tilting roof.

To adapt the bars1) to the size of the objects to be carried, proceed as follows:

1 Turn key A inside lock B of the bar, and pull fig. 116.

B

A

AL0-112

Nm 0 69

C

AL0-113

Fig. 116

Fig. 117

1) These bars*, fitted in the factory, are only available on the domestic market.

Seats and luggage compartment 123

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

2 Push dinamometric key fig. 117 C into its specific slot.

3 To loosen turn key fig. 117 C to the left, and move slide the bar1).

4 To tighten, turn key fig. 117 C to the right, till a torque of 9 Nm is achieved, as shown on the key.

Distribute the load evenly. Each cross bar may carry 50 kg if loaded uniformly over the full length. The permissible roof load (including the carrier system) of 75 kg and the permissible gross vehicle weight must not be exceeded "Technical Data" chapter.

When carrying heavy or large objects on the roof, bear in mind that the vehicle handling changes due to the displacement of the centre of gravity and the increased area exposed to the wind. Driving style and speed must be adapted to allow for this. K

Ashtrays

Ashtray in the central console

Fig. 118

1) Only the front bar may be moved. The rear cannot be dismantled.

1

AL0-037

2 A

AL0-036 Fig. 119

Seats and luggage compartment124

To open ashtray push the cover in the direction of arrow 1 until the cover is set in place while ashtray is completely open fig. 118.

To close the ashtray briefly press in the direction of arrow 2 . The ashtray will close automatically with a spring fig. 119. K

Remove ashtray

Pull the bowl A upwards until removed fig. 119.

Place ashtray

Insert bowl A and press until it is set perfectly in place fig. 119. K

Ashtray in rear doors

To open ashtray press button A in the direction of arrow 1 which will spring open.

To close ashtray push in the direction of arrow 2 until it is completely closed. K

Fig. 120

2

1

A

AL0-039

Seats and luggage compartment 125

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Remove ashtray

Open ashtray and remove bowl by pulling on its outer edge in the direction of arrow 3 .

Place ashtray

Place bowl in its housing and push in the opposite direction of arrow 3 until it is perfectly set in place. Close ashtray. K

Cigarette lighter/Electric sockets

Cigarette lighter

The cigarette lighter is switched on by pushing in the element. When the heating element glows, the lighter springs out automatically pull it out immediately and use it.

Electric socket in the centre console

The cigarette lighter socket can be used for other electrical accessories with a capacity of up to 120 Watts. When the engine is not running this will however discharge the battery. For more information "Accessories, modifications and removal of parts" chapter. K

Fig. 121

3

AL0-040

Exercise caution when using the cigarette lighter!

Careless or uncontrolled use of the cigarette lighter can cause burns.

The cigarette lighter and the socket also work when the ignition is switched off and the key removed.

For this reason children should never be left in the vehicle alone. K

WARNING

Seats and luggage compartment126

Electric sockets in luggage compartment

The 12 Volt socket in the luggage compartment fig. 122 can be used for further electrical consumers with a power rating of up to 96 Watt. The battery will run down if the engine is not running.

If the supply tension falls below a certain level when the engine is switched off, five warning beeps will be heard and the power will switch off after about 2 minutes. It will reconnect when the power supply recovers its normal level.

If the supply tension falls below a certain level when the engine is switched on, the socket will automatically disconnect without warning. It will reconnect when the power supply recovers its normal level.

For more information "Accessories, modifications and removal of parts" chapter.

In cars with a second battery this is used to supply these sockets. K

Stowage box

Stowage compartment in door panel

To open stowage compartment pull in the direction of arrow 1 .

To close push in the direction of arrow 2 . K

AL0-041

21 AL0-026

Fig. 122

Fig. 123

Seats and luggage compartment 127

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Stowage compartment on upper right side of instrument panel

To open the stowage compartment press the area closest to the vents (dotted line) in the direction of arrow which will spring open.

To close lower the cover by hand until completely closed. K

Stowage compartment right of the instrument panel

To open press as indicated by arrows. The stowage compartment springs open.

To close lower the cover by hand until it is completely closed. K

Fig. 124

Fig. 125

AL0-028

AL0-030

Seats and luggage compartment128

Stowage compartment in the central console*

Some model versions may incorporate a stowage compartment between the car radio and the Climatronic. K

Stowage compartment in the boot

The stowage compartment to the right in the boot may be used, for example, to keep the hazard warning triangle.

To open pull the cover in the direction of arrow 1 .

To close push the cover in the direction of arrow 2 . K

ESP

2

PDC

1

AL0-032 Fig. 126 Fig. 127

1

2

AL0-033

Seats and luggage compartment 129

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Passenger side storage compartment

The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever. It is locked when the key slot* is horizontal.

Vehicle wallet compartment

The vehicle wallet should always be kept in this compartment.

Cooling the stowage compartment on the front passenger side

There is an air outlet on the right of the rear panel fig. 128. If the air conditioning is switched on, cooled air can be fed into the compartment. Turn the air vent to open and close it.

Drink can holder*

There are two cup holders in the central console.

To open briefly press in the direction of arrow 1 . The cup holder springs open.

To close press in the direction of arrow 2 until it is completely closed.

Fig. 128

Fig. 129

AUTO

ECON

B7M-0015

Always keep the stowage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in the event of an accident. K

WARNING

12

AL0-034

Seats and luggage compartment130

Folding table

There are folding tables on the rear side of the front seat backrests.

To fold the table move it upwards in the direction of the arrow.

To unfold the table move it downwards in the direction of the arrow.

Do not put any hot drinks, e.g. hot coffee or tea, in the drinks/ can holder whilst the vehicle is in motion. The hot drink could spill in the case of an accident or sudden braking manoeuvre and this could cause scalding. K

WARNING

AL0-035 Fig. 130

When the vehicle is in motion, the folding table should not be folded out if the seats in the middle row are occupied.

There is a risk of injury being caused if the vehicle is braked suddenly! K

WARNING

Climate control 131

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Climate control

Climatronic

Observations

The temperature for the passenger (rear) and drivers (front) compartment can be set independently of each other using this equipment. The maximum difference in temperature can, however, only be 3 C.

With the heating on, the interior is heated by two heat exchangers in the front and rear, respectively, of the vehicle.

With the cooling on, the interior is cooled by means of one or two refrigeration systems, depending on the version of Climatronic.

When the Climatronic version has a second cooling system* in the back, if the cooling is switched on you can set the temperature of the rear seats to as much as 3 C lower than in the front seats, thanks to the vents in the ceiling.

When the Climatronic version does not have a second cooling system* at the rear (no vents in the ceiling), the rear seat temperature is regulated by means of the front seat temperature.

We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the cooling system is switched on as the Climatronic always functions in air recirculation mode in the passenger compartment. Thus the smoke taken in from the vehicle interior will settle on the evaporator. This will lead to permanent odours when the Climatronic is in operation which can only be removed with great effort and at high expense by replacing the evaporator. K

Clear vision which contributes to road safety, can only be guaranteed if all windows are free of ice, snow and mist.

You should, therefore, familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, the removal of the dampness and frost from the windows as well as the cooling system.

The highest possible level of heating and a quick defrosting of the windows can only be achieved when the engine has reached its optimum temperature.

WARNING

Climate control132

1 Display for blower speed for front seats

2 Display AUTO (automatic mode), ECON (compressor off) or OFF (entire system off)

3 Display for ambient temperature

4 Display for defrosting windscreen

5 Display for air recirculation for front seats

6 Display for air flow direction front

7 Display for selected temperature front

8 Blower speed indicator front

9 Display for selected temperature rear

10 Button for Automatic operation (complete system).

11 Button for defrosting windscreen.

12 Button for air recirculation front seats.

13 Button for Blower faster front

14 Button for Blower slower front and button for air conditioner OFF front

15 Button for Air flow to upper part of body front

16 Button for Air flow to footwell front

Controls

AUTO 15 c 22 c 22 c

14

13

12

11

16

15

18

17

20

19

22

21

23

10

21 3 4

5

6 7 8 9

AL0-115 Fig. 131

Climate control 133

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

17 Button for Warmer front

18 Button for Colder front

19 Button for Blower faster rear

20 Button for Blower slower rear and button for air conditioner OFF rear

21 Button for Warmer rear

22 Button for Colder rear

23 ECON button (complete system off)

When the appropriate buttons are pressed the displays 1 , 2 , 7 , 8 and 9 change or the displays 4 , 5 and 6 appear.

The automatic regulation of the system can be influenced by the buttons 11 - 16 , 19 and 20 . K

Climatronic for the drivers compartment (front)

The following standard setting is recommended for all times of the year:

Temperature about 22C (72F) and AUTO button.

With this setting a pleasant climate in the vehicle is reached most quickly.

This setting should therefore only be altered when required for personal comfort.

Arrangement of vents page 139. K

Using the system

When ignition has been switched on the system normally works in the automatic mode. Displays 1 , 2 , 3 , 7 , 8 and 9 appear.

The Climatronic maintains the selected vehicle interior temperature fully automatically.

To do this, the temperature of the air flow as well as the blower speed (air volume) and air distribution are altered automatically.

The system also takes account of intense sunlight. This eliminates the need for a manual re-adjustment.

If the settings deviated from Automatic operation before the ignition is switched off the selected functions are permanently stored. Only the function air recirculation is cancelled after about 20 minutes. K

Climate control134

The interior temperature can be freely selected with buttons 17

and 18 and is stored permanently until another temperature is selected.

The interior temperature can be set between +18C (64F) and +29C (86F). In this range it is automatically regulated.

If temperatures below +18C (64F) are selected LO appears in the display. With temperatures above +29C (86F) HI is displayed.

In these two end positions the system works continuously at maximum cooling or heating output. The temperature is not regulated.

If the blower speed is changed up or down a stage, automatic mode is still retained.

In certain operating conditions it may be found that the system temporarily carries out functions which are not quite as expected. This includes, for example, that for a few seconds after starting from cold, air is directed mainly into the footwell. This is intentional so that damp air in the system does not cause the windows to mist up. K

Notes on Automatic mode (AUTO)

AUTO 15 c 22 c 22 c

14

13

12

11

16

15

18

17

20

19

22

21

23

10

21 3 4

5

6 7 8 9

AL0-115 Fig. 132

Climate control 135

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Partial deviation from Automatic mode

In nearly all cases the Automatic mode offers the best conditions for the comfort of the vehicle occupants all the year round.

In isolated cases however it can be necessary to move away form certain functions of the automatic mode by pressing various buttons. The Climatronic still works automatically.

The blower speed and thus the air volume at the front can be increased or reduced with buttons 13 and 14 . This is shown by a change in the number of lines in display position 1 .

By pressing button 11

the ECON operation is switched off

the air recirculation mode is switched off

the windscreen and side windows can be defrosted or kept free of misting (direct vents 4 onto side windows)

the dehumidifying and defrosting effect for the windscreen can be increased if, for example persons with damp clothing are picked up shortly after moving off.

Air recirculation for the front is selected by pressing button 12 . The symbol 5 appears in the display.

The air recirculation function prevents strong outside smells entering the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or standing in a traffic jam.

Air recirculation can also be selected if the vehicle is to be heated or cooled quickly. In this mode, air is drawn in from the vehicle interior and heated or cooled.

Smoking should be avoided when air recirculation is selected, as the smoke drawn in from the vehicle interior deposits on the evaporator of the Climatronic. This leads to permanent odours when the Climatronic is in operation. These can only be eliminated by exchanging the evaporator, which is time-consuming and expensive.

With buttons 15 and 16 the air flow can be to the upper part of the body or into the footwell.

The combination of buttons 11 and 16 can be used to direct the air flow both to the windscreen and into the footwell.

The combination of buttons 15 and 16 can be used to direct the air flow both to the upper body and into the footwell.

Button 23 (ECON) switches the cooling system off. In this mode, the heating is automatically regulated (without air dehumidifying and cooling), with the desired interior temperature being attained as quickly as possible and maintained.

The air recirculation mode should not be used for an extended period as no fresh air is drawn in and the windows could mist up.

WARNING

Climate control136

Please note that in ECON mode, the desired interior temperature cannot be lower that the ambient temperature.

The combination ECON mode with air recirculation is only possible if button 12 is pressed first and then the ECON button.

Pressing buttons 10 , 11 or 12 will switch off the ECON mode.

The entire system can switched off with button 14 (OFF). Press and hold button 14 until the word OFF appears in display 2 . This function should only be used in isolated cases, e.g. if there is a fault in the system.

Note

When the special functions are no longer required the automatic mode should be switched on again as soon as possible by pressing the button 10

(AUTO). K

Climatronic for the passenger compartment (rear)

With a second cooling system

The Climatronic in the rear only functions in the air recirculation mode. Fresh air is not fed into the vehicle.

Smoking should be avoided when air recirculation is selected, as the smoke drawn in from the vehicle interior deposits on the evaporator of the Climatronic. This leads to permanent odours when the Climatronic is in operation. These can only be eliminated

by exchanging the evaporator, which is timeconsuming and expensive.

Cooled air via the vents in the roof or warmed air through the vents in the floor to the rear (buttons 19 - 22 ) can be controlled depending on the setting for the front (buttons 11 - 18 ).

The inside temperature for the rear seats may be selected with switches 21 and 22 , and will be memorised until another temperature is selected. When this is done, bear in mind the following:

When choosing the temperature for the front seats (position 7 ) and for the rear seats (position 9 ), the maximum difference between the two may not exceed 3C.

When the Climatronic detects the need to heat the inside, it also activates the additional heat exchanger. The hot air comes out of the floor vents.

When the Climatronic detects the need to cool the interior, it directs cool air to the rear seats through the ceiling vents.

Buttons 19 and 20 are used to switch off the blowers for the rear seats and to increase or reduce the air flow. This will be shown at position 8 by a series of lines which will increase or decrease as you press

Positions 8 and 9 are switched off when you disconnect the turbine. K

Climate control 137

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Without a second cooling system

The Climatronic in the rear only functions in the air recirculation mode. Fresh air is not fed into the vehicle.

Smoking should be avoided when air recirculation is selected, as the smoke drawn in from the vehicle interior deposits on the evaporator of the Climatronic. This leads to permanent odours when the Climatronic is in operation. These can only be eliminated by exchanging the evaporator, which is time-consuming and expensive.

Cooled air via the vents in the roof or warmed air through the vents in the floor to the rear (buttons 19 - 22 ) can be controlled depending on the setting for the front (buttons 11 - 18 ).

The interior temperature in the rear can be freely selected with buttons 21 and 22 and remains stored until another temperature is selected. Please note:

A difference of up to 3 C is possible between the temperature settings for the front (pos. 7 ) and the rear (pos. 9 ). For the rear seats it is not possible to select lower temperature than for the front seats.

If the Climatronic determines that the interior of the vehicle must be warmed up it will also activate the additional heat exchanger. the warn air flows out through the vents in the floor.

Climatronic for the rear seats

AUTO 15 c 22 c 22 c

14

13

12

11

16

15

18

17

20

19

22

21

23

10

21 3 4

5

6 7 8 9

AL0-115 Fig. 133

Climate control138

If the Climatronic determines that the interior of the vehicle must be cooled down, cooled air is introduced through the air vents in the roof.

The blower speed and thus the air volume in the rear can be increased or reduced with buttons 19 and 20 . This is shown by a change in the number of lines in display position 8 .

Positions 8 and 9 are switched off when you disconnect the blowers. K

Climate control 139

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

When the appropriate buttons are pressed, heated, unheated air or cooled air flows from all vents in the front.

The vents are controlled automatically by the Climatronic in AUTO mode.

When the AUTO mode is switched off, the vents can be controlled using buttons 11 , 15 and 16 .

Vents 3 and 4 can be opened and closed separately. Moreover,

1

2

2

4 3 3

2

2

4

55

6 66

1 1 1

AL0-022

Air vents in drivers compartment (front)

Fig. 134

Climate control140

the air flow from these vents can be changed vertically and horizontally fig. 135.

The rear footwell vents 6 are supplied together with vents 5 . K

Opening/closing vents

Vents 3 and 4 can be opened and closed individually:

Vent closed: knurled wheel to . . . . . . . 0

Vent opened: knurled wheel to . . . .

Adjust direction of airflow

Vertical move knurled wheel 1 upwards or downwards.

Horizontal move knurled wheel 2 to the left or right. K

Air vents in passenger compartment (rear)

Vent in floor

The vents are in the side trim on the floor of the passenger compartment at the rear left of the vehicle. Warm air will flow out of these vents when the interior temperature has been set to the highest level using button 21 . HI will appear in the Climatronic display.

Note

Please do not use the area around the vents as stowage space as the vent openings will be blocked and the additional heat exchanger blower will turn off due to overheating.

Fig. 135

Fig. 136AL0-116

1

2

AL0-023

Climate control 141

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Vent in roof*

Only when the Cimatronic has a second cooling system

The air vents in the roof are situated above each seat in the rear only cooled air enters the vehicle.

The roof vents can be closed or opened separately and can also be adjusted by pivoting the vent grilles fig. 138.

Note

When cooled air mode is switched on, at least one vent in the roof area must be open or the cooling system may ice up. K

Opening/closing vents

To close vent turn wheel A down.

To open vent turn wheel A up.

Changing air flow direction:

Vertically move grille up or down.

Horizontally move lever B in the grille to the left or right. K

Fig. 137 Fig. 138

Warm air coming from the vent can damage heat sensitive items. K

WARNING

A B AL0-118AL0-117

Climate control142

General notes

Ensure that the sensor on the air grille next to the display is not covered up.

To ensure that the Climatronic can work properly, the air inlet in front of the windscreen should be kept free of ice, snow and leaves.

The heat output depends on the coolant temperature the full heat output is therefore available when the engine is warm.

Odours caused by a build-up of natural deposits in the vaporiser can occur if the AUTO system has not been used for some time. The cooling system should be turned on at full blast at least once a month even during cold spells to clear or to prevent the odours.

The stale air escapes through openings in the luggage compartment side panels. Therefore when loading the luggage compartment ensure that the openings are not covered.

When the ambient temperature is high and the air very humid, condensed water can drip off the evaporator and form a puddle under the vehicle. This is quite normal and does not indicate a leak.

To prevent the windows from misting up the blower should be running slowly when driving at low speeds. To do this select ECON or AUTO. K

Using Climatronic economically

In cooling operation the Climatronic compressor places demands on the engine and therefore influences the fuel consumption. To

keep the period switched on as short as possible, the following points should be noted:

If the inside temperature is very high after the car has been parked in the sun, it is recommended to open doors or windows briefly to enable the hot air to escape.

The compressor should not be switched on during a journey if the windows or sliding roof* are open.

ECON mode should be selected if the desired interior temperature can be attained without switching on the air conditioner. K

Operating faults

If all the symbols in the display area flash for some 15 seconds after switching the ignition on, there is a fault in the system. Contact a Technical Service Centre.

Should the cooling system not work at any time, either:

the ambient temperature is below about +5 C,

the Climatronic compressor has switched off due to coolant temperature being too high.

or the fuses have blown.

Check the fuse and if necessary replace "Fuses" chapter. If the trouble is not due to a defective fuse, have Climatronic checked.

If the cooling output drops off, switch the Climatronic off and have the system checked. K

Driving 143

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Driving

Manual gearbox

Driving a car with a manual gearbox

Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary. When the engine is running, depress the clutch fully and wait a few seconds before moving the gear lever. This will prevent grating noises. To engage reverse gear, pull the safety ring A up slightly and guide the gear stick to the right and to the rear.

When reverse gear is engaged with ignition on, the reversing lights come on.

Note

When driving you should not rest your hand on the gear lever. The pressure of your hand is transmitted to the selector forks in the gearbox and can cause premature wear on the forks. K

Automatic gearbox*

Driving programmes

The gearbox management is fitted with several driving programmes. According to the driving style or to the momentary

Fig. 139

Fig. 140

1

R

3 5

2 4 6

AL0-015

P

R

N

D

3

2

1

AL0-120

Driving144

situation, an economy, low-consumption, or a more sporty programme will be selected.

The programme is selected automatically depending on the movement of the accelerator pedal.

If the accelerator pedal is moved slowly, or at a normal rate, the gearbox will shift into a higher gear earlier, and down into a lower gear later to reduce fuel consumption.

A more sporty programme is selected when the accelerator pedal moves fast. The pedal does not have to be depressed to the point of kick-down page 146. In this mode, the gearbox will shift up later to make full use of the engine power reserves.

The downward shift occurs at a higher rate of revolutions than in the economy programmes.

The gear box is self adapting, and continuously selects the most suitable gear programme. At the same time, the driver can also make the gear box switch to a more sporty programme by pressing the accelerator quickly. Depending on road speed, this makes the gearbox shift down early into a lower gear for quicker acceleration (for instance to overtake another vehicle), without having to press the accelerator all the way down to the kick-down position. After the gear box has shifted back up it returns to the original programme, depending on your style of driving.

The gear box adapts the gear shifts for uphill and downhill gradients. This prevents the gearbox from shifting up and down unnecessarily on uphill gradients. On downhill gradients, the gearbox shifts down into a lower gear when the driver presses the brake pedal. This makes use of the braking effect of the engine without having to change down manually.

Note

Depending on road resistance, for example when trailer towing or on uphill stretches, a programme is automatically selected which provides more power by shifting into a lower gear. This prevents frequent gear changes. K

Selector lever lock

In positions P and N with the ignition switched on the selector lever is locked. To move the selector lever out of these positions the brake pedal must be depressed and the selector lever button pushed-in. This prevents a gear being engaged inadvertently and the vehicle unintentionally moving off.

A delay circuit prevents the selector lever from locking when it is moved quickly past the N position (for instance from R to D). This enables for example the vehicle to be rocked out of a bogged down position. The shift lock only locks the selector lever if it is left in the N position for more than about 1 second without the brake pedal being depressed.

At speeds above 5 km/h the selector lever lock is automatically switched-off in position N.

Safety interlock for ignition key

The key can only be withdrawn with the ignition switched off and the selector lever in position P (parking lock).

When the ignition key is removed, the selector lever is locked in position P. K

Driving 145

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Selector lever positions

In the combi-instrument there is a display that shows the selector lever position currently selected.

P Parking lock

The driving wheels are locked mechanically.

The parking lock may only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. Before moving the lever in or out of the P position the

lock button in the selector lever handle must be pressed. Before moving the selector lever out of the P position with the ignition switched on, the brake pedal must also be depressed.

R Reverse gear

The reverse gear should only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and with the engine idling. Before engaging the position R from the positions P or N the brake pedal must be depressed and the lock button in the selector lever handle must also be pressed.

The reversing lights come on then the selector lever is in the R position with the ignition switched on.

N Neutral (idling position)

To move the lever out of neutral when stationary or at speeds below 5 km/h and with ignition switched on depress the brake pedal and press the lock button in the selector lever handle.

D Normal driving position

The four forward gears are shifted up and down automatically depending upon engine load and road speed.

Under certain driving conditions it is advantageous to engage one of the following described selector lever positions.

3 Position for hilly regions

The 1st, 2nd and 3rd gears are shifted up and down automatically depending upon engine load, road speed and selected programme (E or S). The 4th gear is not engaged. This increases the engine braking effect when the accelerator pedal is released.

Fig. 141

Never shift selector lever to position R or P whilst the vehicle is in motion. The gears could be damaged risk of accident!

WARNING

6

7

8

1/min x1000

0

20

40

60

30

50

Km/h

C

AL0-121

Driving146

This selector position is recommended in situations where the gearbox alternates frequently between 3rd and 4th gears in the D position.

2 Position for steep hills

This selector lever position is suitable for long climbs and descents.

The 1st and 2nd gears are shifted up and down automatically depending on engine load and road speed. The 3rd and 4th gears are not engaged in order to avoid unnecessary gear changes. This further increases the engine braking effect on deceleration.

1 Position for very steep hills

This selector lever position is recommended for very steep descents.

To engage this gear, the lock button in the selector lever handle must be pressed in. The vehicle only moves in 1st gear. The 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears are not engaged. Maximum possible engine braking effect is now available.

The cruise control * cannot be used in position 1.

Note

When changing down manually the selector lever can be moved into gears 3, 2, and 1, but the gearbox will not change down until it is no longer possible to overrev the engine. K

Kick-down device

The kick-down device gives maximum acceleration. When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down past the full throttle position, depending on road speed and engine speed, the box

changes down into a lower gear. The shift into the next higher gear then takes place as soon as the maximum specified engine speed is reached.

Notes on driving

Starting

The engine can only be started when selector lever is at N or P Starting engine.

Selecting a driving range

When the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running always depress the foot brake when selecting a gear.

When the vehicle is stationary do not depress the accelerator when selecting a gear.

If the lever is moved accidentally into N when driving, release accelerator and let the engine speed drop to idling before selecting a forward gear again.

Please note that the driven wheels could go into a spin if the kick-down device is applied on roads with black ice.

Risk of skidding! K

WARNING

When the engine in running it is necessary t hold the vehicle with the foot brake in all gears. Because with an automatic gearbox the transfer of power

WARNING

Driving 147

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Moving off

Select driving range (R, D, 3, 2, 1). Wait until the gearbox has shifted and the power flow is made to the driving wheels (light selection jerk perceptible). Then one can accelerate.

Stopping

When the vehicle is stopped for a short period, for example at traffic lights, it is only necessary to apply the brakes. It is not necessary to move selector lever to N. The engine should however only be running at idling speed.

Parking

On a gradient the handbrake should be applied firmly first and then the parking lock engaged. This will ensure that the locking mechanism is not too heavily loaded and makes the lock easier to disengage.

Tow starting

On vehicles with automatic gearbox the engine cannot be started by towing or pushing the vehicle "Tow starting" chapter.

When the battery is flat, the engine can be started from the battery of another vehicle by using jumper cables Emergency starting.

Towing

If the car has to be towed at any time, you must necessarily follow the instructions "Tow starting" chapter. K

in not fully interrupted even at idling speed and the vehicle tends to creep.

When the vehicle is stationary and a gear is engaged, the throttle must not be opened inadvertently on any account (for instance by hand from the engine compartment). Otherwise the vehicle will move immediately even if the hand brake has been fully applied.

Before working on the vehicle with the engine running, apply the handbrake and put the selector lever in P.

WARNING (continued)

To prevent the vehicle rolling away inadvertently, you should always apply the handbrake firmly when the vehicle has come to the complete stop. Also place the gear selector lever in position P.

WARNING

Driving148

Tiptronic

"Tiptronic" enables the driver to change gears manually.

To switch to the manual program press selector lever in position "D" towards the right. The change can take place with the vehicle stationary or driving. As soon as the program has switched "5, 4, 3, 2, 1" will appear on the digital screen. The current gear will be displayed fig. 142.

For longer gears press the selector lever forward (+) and for shorter gears press it backwards ().

When accelerating the gears 1, 2, 3 and 4 will shift just before reaching the highest revolutions possible.

If you shift from any gear to a shorter gear, the automatic mechanism will not shift unless the engine no longer exceeds rpm's. K

Selector lever lock

AL0-123 Fig. 143

Fig. 144

P

R

N

D

3

2

1

P

R

N

D

3

2

1

AL0-124

6

7

8

1/min x1000

0

20

40

60

30

50

Km/h

C

AL0-122 Fig. 142

Driving 149

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Automatic gear lock

When the ignition is switched on the selector lever is locked in the positions "P" and "N".

To unlock press the brakes. This way, you will prevent involuntary shifting of gears and moving of the vehicle.

When the selector lever is in the positions "P" and "N" the driver will see a display on the digital screen of the instrument panel with the message "PRESS BRAKES TO SHIFT GEAR WHILE CAR STATIONARY". Furthermore, the shift area will display the symbol which appeared earlier.

The selector lever lock is automatically unlocked in the "N" position if the speed of 5 km/h is exceeded.

Lock button

The lock button for the selector lever prevents the involuntary shift of gears. By pressing this button the lever is unlocked.

The fig. 144 shows the positions in which the button in the lever must be pressed.

Lock for removal of ignition key

Once the ignition is switched on the key can only be removed if the lever is in the position "P" (parking lock).

Once the key is removed the selector lever remains locked in the position "P". K

Handbrake

Using the handbrake

To apply the handbrake pull lever up firmly. On hills the 1st gear or with automatic gearbox the parking lock should also be engaged. The handbrake should always be applied so firmly that it is not possible to drive inadvertently with the handbrake on.

When handbrake is applied with the ignition on, the brake warning lamp comes on.

To release handbrake, pull lever up slightly, press locking knob (arrow) in and push lever right down.

Fig. 145TO8-029

Driving150

Ignition lock

Electronic engine block

When you switch the ignition on, the vehicle and the key automatically compare data, which is shown by a warning lamp in the dashboard "Warning lamps" chapter.

If the wrong (i.e. false) key is used, the car will not start and the immobiliser warning lamp will come on. K

Position of the ignition key

Petrol engines

1 Ignition and engine switched off:

Steering can be locked.

2 Ignition on

3 Starting engine

Diesel engines

1 Fuel supply cut off and engine switched off:

Steering can be locked.

2 Glow plugs/normal running position

To avoid unnecessary strain on the battery, do not use any other major electrical equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.

3 Starting engine

To prevent the vehicle rolling away inadvertently, you should always apply the handbrake firmly after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

You should also put the car into gear (manual gearbox) or the gear selector lever in position P (automatic gearbox).

Please note that the handbrake must be released completely after application. If the handbrake is only partly released it could lead to overheating of the brakes and thus negatively affect the function of the brake system. This could also lead to premature rear brake lining wear. K

WARNING

2

3

1

B8D-005 Fig. 146

Driving 151

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

For all vehicles:

Position 1

To lock the steering wheel withdraw the key and turn the wheel until you hear the pin engage.

In vehicles with automatic gearbox the key can only be turned to position 1 and withdrawn when the selector lever is in the P position.

Position 2

If the key is difficult to turn in the lock, move the steering wheel until the key turns freely.

Position 3

Before the starter can be operated a second time the key must be turned back to position 1 . This prevents the starter motor from engaging while the engine is running, as this could damage the starter. K

Ignition key lock*

On vehicles with an automatic gearbox* after switching off the ignition the ignition key can only be withdrawn if the selector lever is in the P position.

When the ignition key has been withdrawn the selector lever is locked in this position. K

Starting the engine

General notes

Before starting, move gear lever to neutral (with automatic gearbox, selector lever in P or N position) and apply handbrake firmly.

On vehicles with a manual gearbox depress the clutch pedal when operating starter so that starter only has to turn engine.

As soon as engine starts, release the ignition key so that starter can disengage.

After starting a cold engine it may sound noisy for a moment or two because the oil pressure has to build up in the hydraulic tappets first. This is normal and no cause for alarm.

On vehicles with manual gearbox, never remove the key from the steering lock while the vehicle is moving. Otherwise the steering wheel may lock unexpectedly.

WARNING

When running the engine in confined spaces there is a danger of poisoning.

WARNING

Driving152

For the sake of the environment

Do not warm engine up by running it with vehicle stationary. Drive off straight away.

Do not over-rev or use full throttle until the engine has reached the normal operating temperature.

On vehicles with a catalytic converter the engine must not be started by towing the vehicle in excess of 50 m. Otherwise unburned fuel can pass into the converter and lead to damage.

Before trying to start the engine by towing, an attempt should be made, if possible, to use the battery of another vehicle "Start up help" chapter. K

Petrol engines

These engines are equipped with a petrol injection system that automatically supplies the correct fuel/air mixture at all ambient temperatures.

When engine is cold or at operating temperature do not accelerate before or during the starting procedure.

If the engine does not start at once, stop using the starter after 10 seconds. wait about half a minute and then try again.

If the engine still does not start, the electric fuel pump fuse may have blown "Fuses" chapter.

When the engine is very hot it may be necessary to accelerate slightly after the engine has started. K

Diesel engines

Glow plug system

After switching to the driving position (ignition on), the required glow plug warm-up time is indicated by a lamp which is controlled by the coolant temperature "Instruments" chapter.

Starting a cold engine

Ambient temperature above +5C:

The engine can be started without preglow. Do not depress throttle during the starting procedure.

Ambient temperature below +5C:

Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 fig. 146 "Ignition lock" chapter the glow plug warning lamp comes on. It goes out when the ignition temperature is reached.

While the glow plugs are working do not switch on any heavy current consumers because this would place an unnecessary load on the battery.

If despite this the engine does not start, the fuse may have blown "Fuses" chapter.

When the warning lamp goes out, start the engine immediately.

Do not depress the accelerator while starting.

If the engine only fires irregularly, continue to operate the starter a few seconds longer (30 seconds at maximum) until the engine runs under its own power.

Driving 153

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

If the engine does not start, switch the glow plugs on again and try starting it again as described.

Starting a warm engine

The glow plug lamp does not come on the engine can be started straight away. K

Starting after running out of fuel

If the tank on vehicles with a diesel engine was empty, starting after filling with diesel fuel can take longer than normal up to one minute. This is because the fuel system must first be freed of air before starting. K

Stopping the engine

Valid for all engines

Caution

When the engine has been subjected to a heavy engine load for a long time, the engine must not be switched off abruptly. Let it idle for about 2 minutes to avoid overheating.

Valid for all versions with catalytic converter*

Caution

Do not switch off the ignition while the vehicle is in motion with a gear engaged; otherwise unburned fuel may go into the converter, where it would burn and cause overheating, which would damage the converter. K

After the engine has been stopped the fan can continue running for a while (up to about 10 minutes) with the ignition switched off. It can also start to run again suddenly after a short time if

the coolant temperature increases due to heat build-up

when the engine is hot and the engine compartment is heated additionally by strong sunlight.

Special care must therefore be taken when working in the engine compartment. K

WARNING

Driving154

Cruise control system*

Description

To relieve the foot on the accelerator pedal this system can hold any speed above around 30 km/h constant, so far as this is permitted by engine output.

Caution

When the system is switched on do not move into neutral without de- pressing the clutch pedal, otherwise the engine will race and can, under certain circumstances, become damaged.

Note

On vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the Cruise Control System is only active when the gear selector is in position D, 3 or 2. If any other position (P, N, R or 1) is selected while driving, the last speed to be stored is deleted and the system is switched off. K

Switching on

The system is operated with the sliding switch A and the press button B on the turn signal/main beam lever.

The system is switched on by moving switch A to ON. K

Storing speed

When the speed to be maintained has been reached the press button fig. 147 B (SET) must be pressed briefly. The foot can then be taken off the accelerator pedal.

The speed can also be increased in the normal way with the accelerator pedal. When the pedal is then released the previously programmed speed is resumed.

The cruise control system should not be used in dense traffic and poor road conditions (slippery surfaces, aquaplaning, gravel).

WARNING

B A

B8L-068 Fig. 147

Driving 155

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

This however, is not the case when the stored speed is exceeded by more than 10 km/h for a period of more than 5 minutes. The speed must then be stored again.

Altering stored speed

Reducing/setting

The stored speed can be reduced by pressing button fig. 147 B .

By pressing button fig. 147 B briefly, the stored speed is reduced by a preset amount. If you pres and hold the button, the speed will decrease through automatic deceleration. The speed reached when reducing the button will be stored.

If the button is released at a speed of less than approx. 30 km/h, the memory is deleted. The speed must then, if necessary, be reset using button fig. 147 B after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed higher than approx. 30 km/h.

Accelerating/storing

The stored speed can be increased without depressing the accelerator by moving the slide control fig. 147 A to RES.

By briefly pressing the slide control, the speed is increased by a preset amount. If the switch is moved to the left and held, the

speed is increased through automatic acceleration. The speed reached when the switch is released is then saved. K

Switching system off temporarily

Vehicles with manual gearbox:

The system is temporarily switched off when the brake or clutch pedals are used or when the switch A is moved to OFF (not engaged).

The speed stored at this time will remain in the memory.

To resume the previously stored speed push switch A fully to the left after the brake or clutch pedals are released.

The programmed speed must only be resumed when it is not too high for the existing traffic conditions! K

WARNING

B A

B8L-068 Fig. 148

Driving156

Vehicles with automatic gear box:

The system is temporarily switched off when the brake or clutch pedals are used or when the switch fig. 148 A is moved to AUS (not engaged).

The speed stored at this time will remain in the memory.

To resume the previously stored speed push switch fig. 148 A

fully to the left after the brake or clutch pedals are released.

Furthermore, the system will be switched off temporarily if the selector lever is moved to positions N or 1.

The speed stored in the memory at this time will be deleted.

Storing speed

If no speed was saved before the system was temporarily switched off or if the stored speed was deleted, a new speed can be stored in the following manner:

Move switch fig. 148 A fully to the left and hold until the desired speed has been reached. The speed is stored when the switch is released.

or

Press button fig. 148 B briefly. The current speed is stored. K

Switching the system off completely

Vehicles with a manual gear box:

The system is completely switched off when switch fig. 148 A

is moved entirely to the right (OFF engaged) or when the vehicle is stopped and the ignition is switched off.

Vehicles with automatic gear box:

The system is completely switched off by selecting one of the following positions by moving the selector lever:

to positions P, N, R or 1.

or

by switching the ignition off when the vehicle is stationary. K

The programmed speed must only be resumed when it is not too high for existing traffic conditions.

WARNING

The programmed speed must only be resumed if it complies with the speed regulations of that moment.

WARNING

157Refuelling

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Tips and Maintenance

Refuelling

Filling the tank

General notes

The filler neck is on the rear right side panel of the vehicle.

The tank flap is automatically locked and unlocked with the central locking. If the central locking system is defective the flap can be opened by hand see next page.

The tank holds about 70 litres.

When tank cap has been taken off it can be placed on the tank flap fig. 149.

Filling the tank without problem depends largely on the correct operation of the petrol pump:

Do not place the nozzle too deeply into the filler neck and do not place the nozzle at an angle.

Do not select a high flow rate the fuel (particularly Diesel) will otherwise foam up. This could cause the petrol pump to switch off prematurely.

For the sake of the environment

As soon as the correctly operated automatic nozzle switches off for the first time, the tank is full. Do not try then to put more fuel in because the expansion space in tank will be filled the fuel can then overflow when it becomes warm.

After filling tank, screw cap on tightly and lock it.

Note

Any fuel spillage should be wiped off the paint finish immediately, as the paint could otherwise be damaged, especially if it is RME (biodiesel) fuel.

Fig. 149

AL0-042

158 Refuelling

Caution

On vehicles with a catalytic converter, never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty. The irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring. This allows unburnt fuel into the exhaust system, which can cause overheating and damage to the catalyst. K

Releasing tank flap manually

If the central locking system should fail, the flap can be released manually:

Open tailgate and if fitted fold back the right luggage compartment trim from side panel.

Then push the locking rod in front of the white diaphragm housing backward slightly in direction of arrow fig. 150. K

Petrol

In the chapter Technical Data and on the inside of the tank flap you will find information on the correct octane rating for your engine. K

General notes

Unleaded petrol must comply with DIN EN1) 228 and leaded petrol with DIN 51 600.

If, in an emergency, the octane rating of the available petrol is lower than that required by the engine, only drive with medium engine speeds and low engine loading. High engine loading with full throttle or high revs can cause engine damage. Fill tank with petrol of the correct octane rating as soon as possible.

Fuel with a higher octane rating than that required by the engine can be used without limitation. There are, however, no advantages regarding output and consumption.

For the sake of the environment

Even one tankful of leaded petrol will detract from the efficiency of the catalytic converter.

Note

See chapter Filling the tank. K

1) European norm

B7M-093C Fig. 150

159Refuelling

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Petrol additives

The quality of the fuel has a decisive influence upon the running behavior, performance and service life of the engine. The additives which are mixed into the petrol are of particular significance. It is therefore advisable only to use good quality petrol containing additives. K

Diesel

Diesel

Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN1) 590.

CZ2) no lower than 49. K

RME fuel (diester)

According to norm DIN 51 6063).

Vehicles with diesel engines can also run on RME fuel (Rapeseed Methyl Ester).

Ask your Technical Service Centre or automobile club where biodiesel is available.

See chapter "Filling the tank". K

Properties of RME

RME is chemically produced from vegetable oil (predominantly rapeseed oil) in a process whereby the oil is mixed with methanol and converted, via a catalyst, into RME.

RME is almost totally sulfur free. The combustion of RME thus emits practically no sulfur dioxide (SO2).

Exhaust gas contains less

carbon monoxide

hydrocarbons

particles (i.e. soot)

than with conventional diesel fuel.

All emission values are lower than legal requirements.

RME fuel is biodegradable.

Performance may be slightly lower.

Fuel consumption may be slightly higher.

RME can be used in temperatures down to approximately 10 C.

Diesel fuel must be added at ambient temperatures of less than 10 C to prevent deterioration to the biodiesel. The mixing ratio of diesel to biodiesel must be approximately 50:50.

If the RME ratio exceeds 50%, too much smoke may be formed.

During the summer months, RME may be mixed with diesel at any ratio. K

1) European norm

2) Cetan-Zahl (Cetane Number). Measure of diesel fuel ignitability.

3) DIN preliminary Norm

160 Refuelling

Driving in winter

When using summer Diesel trouble may be experienced at temperatures below 0 C because the fuel thickens due to wax separation.

For this reason winter Diesel which is more resistant to cold is sold during the winter in some countries, and this works correctly down to between 15 C and 22 C approximately, depending on the brand of fuel used.

The biodiesel available in countries with different climactic conditions usually has different temperature characteristics. Technical Service Centres or service stations in each country can inform you of the specific characteristics of the respective diesel. K

Filter preheating

The vehicle is fitted with a filter preheater. This will ensure that the fuel system will remain operational down to about 25 C, provided that winter Diesel which is cold resistant down to 15 C is used.

If, at temperatures below 25 C the fuel is waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start it is sufficient to place the vehicle in a warm enclosure for a while.

Fuel additives (anti-waxing agent), petrol and similar fluids must not be mixed with Diesel fuel. K

161Intelligent technology

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Intelligent technology

Brakes

General notes

Brake lining wear depends to a large extent on the operating conditions and style of driving. On vehicles which are used mainly in town traffic and stop/ start conditions or are driven hard it may be necessary to have the thickness of the brake linings checked by a Technical Service Centre in between the intervals given in the Inspection and Service Schedule.

Change down in good time when driving downhill, in order to make use of the engine braking effect. This relieves strain on the brake system. When the brakes are applied do not keep them on continuously, apply and release alternately. K

What can have a negative effect on the brakes?

Wet or gritted road surface

Overheating of the brakes

Under certain conditions e.g. after driving through water, heavy rain falls or after the vehicle has been washed, the brakes could set in later than normal due to damp, or in winter frozen, brake discs and linings the brakes must first be dried through careful braking.

WARNING

Full braking power might also set in later than normal even when driving on gritted roads if you have not braked for some time the layer of salt on the brake disks and brake linings must first be worn down whilst braking.

WARNING (continued)

Never let the brakes rub by pressing the pedal too lightly when you do not really need to brake. This causes the brakes to overheat, leads to longer braking distances and to a higher level of wear.

Before starting on a long stretch of road in a very hilly area, please reduce your speed, change to a lower gear (manual gearbox) or choose a lower position (automatic gearbox). In this way you will use the braking power of the engine and relieve pressure on the brakes.

If a front spoiler, full size wheel trims etc., is retrofitted, it is necessary to ensure that the flow of air to the front brakes is not restricted otherwise the brakes can overheat. K

WARNING

Servobrake

Anti-locking brake system*

The ABS plays a major part in increasing the active safety of the vehicle. The big advantage when compared with a conventional brake system is that even when braking hard on a slippery road surface the best possible steerability is retained for the road condition because the wheels do not lock. Steering control is therefore maintained, giving the best driving stability possible.

However, one must not expect the ABS system to shorten the braking distance under all conditions. When driving on gravel or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface, i.e. when one should be driving very slowly and carefully, the stopping distance may even be slightly longer.

Modifications to the vehicle (i.e.: the brake system or the drive- train) may affect the antilock system operation*, for this reason we advise you to bear in mind the instructions in the "Accessories" chapter.

How the ABS* system works

An automatic check is made when a speed of approx. 6 km/h is reached. When this happens a pumping noise can be heard.

When the turning speed of a wheel reaches a level which is too low for the vehicle speed and it tends to lock, the brake pressure to this wheel is reduced. On the front axle the brake pressure is regulated for each wheel individually, whereas on the rear axle, the pressure is regulated for both wheels at the same time. As a result the braking effect is the same for both rear wheels and the driving stability is retained as far as possible. This regulating process makes itself known by movement of the brake pedal and is accompanied by noises. This is done deliberately as a warning to the driver that a wheel or the wheels are in the locking range. So that the ABS can regulate effectively in this range the brake pedal must remain depressed on no account should it be pumped!

If a defect occurs on the ABS it is indicated by one or two warning lamps. K

162 Intelligent technology

The servo is operated by a vacuum which is only generated when the engine is running. For this reason the vehicle should not be allowed to roll with the engine switched off.

When the brake servo is not working because, for example, the vehicle is being towed or a defect has occurred on the brake servo itself, the brake pedal must be pressed considerably harder to compensate for the absence of servo assistance. K

WARNING

However the ABS system cannot overcome the physical limits. This must be borne in mind particularly on slippery or wet roads. When the ABS comes into the control range the speed must immediately be adapted to the road and traffic conditions. The increased amount of safety available must not tempt one into taking risks.

WARNING

163Intelligent technology

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Four-wheel drive*

The concept of four-wheel drives

The four-wheel drive vehicles are fitted with a completely automatic drive on all four wheels.

It automatically distributes the drive power and adapts perfectly to the driving style and specific surface conditions.

Other important notes

Winter tyres

With the four wheel drive, the vehicles drive is good in the winter, even with serial tyres. However, we recommend the use of winter tyres or all-weather tyres on all four wheels to further improve driving and braking.

Snow chains

Snow chains should also be used on four-wheel drive vehicles when it is mandatory. For more information on the use of snow chains page 211.

Rims/tyre change

For four-wheel drive versions, all four wheels must have the same tread surface.

For further information page 208. K

The driving style always needs to be adjusted to suit the road surface and traffic conditions. Increased safety should not encourage one to take unnecessary risks.

The braking capacity is limited by the adherence of the wheels and does not differ from a regular vehicle with a two-wheel drive.

For this reason, even though on slippery surface the acceleration is good, it should never induce one to drive at excessive speeds.

On humid surfaces keep in mind that the front wheels can also suffer from aquaplaning if the speed is excessive. As opposed to vehicles with front wheel drive, the beginning of aquaplaning is not announced by a sudden increase in engine revolutions. We recommend not to drive at excessive speeds and always adjust to the road conditions. K

WARNING

164 Intelligent technology

Wheelspin control (TCS)

In vehicles with front wheel traction, the TCS lowers the engine power to stop the wheel spinning when you accelerate. This feature works at any speed in combination with the ABS. If there is an ABS breakdown, the TCS stops working.

Vehicles fitted with TCS are also fitted with an electronic differential lock (EDL).

The EDL makes it much easier, or even possible, to pull away, accelerate and climb steep gradiants in unfavourable conditions.

The EDL works fully automatically the driver does not need to do anything at all.

It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speed of the driving wheels. Up to a speed of about 80 km/h (50 mph), a difference in speed of the drive wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by a slippery road surface on one side is balanced out by slowing down the wheel which is slipping and thereby applying more driving force to the other drive wheel through the differential.

This control procedure can be detected by the sound it makes.

In order to obtain the best possible effect from the EDL, always use the clutch and accelerator pedals according to the road conditions.

To ensure that the brake disc of the braked wheel does not overheat, the EDL will automatically switch itself off if excessive demands are placed on it. The vehicle remains operational and has the same characteristics as a vehicle without EDL. For this reason, the switching off of the EDL is not noticed.

As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the EDL will switch itself back on again.

If the ABS warning lamp lights up there may be a fault present in the EDL. Take the vehicle to a Technical Service Centre as soon as possible!

The TCS connects automatically once the engine is started. If necessary, it can be connected or disconnected by pressing shortly the button located on the central console.

When the TCS is switched off a pilot light comes on.

You should normally always have the TCS on. Only in exceptional circumstances when you want the wheels to spin should you switch it off. For instance:

When you are using snow chains.

When driving in deep snow or on a soft surface.

When the car is stuck, to rock it out, and

When accelerating on a slippery road surface, e.g. on ice or snow, use the accelerator pedal carefully. The wheels can spin, even with EDL, and thus impair driving stability.

WARNING

The style of driving must always be adapted to suit the road surface and traffic conditions. The increased safety offered by the EDL should not encourage one to take unnecessary risks.

WARNING

165Intelligent technology

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

To go up slopes where each traction wheel is on a surface with a very different grip (I.e. ice on the left, dry asphalt on the right). The EDS continues to function under these conditions.

Afterwards you should always reconnect this device.

Note

For the TCS to work properly all four wheels should be the same. Otherwise engine performance may be reduced.

Changing wheels. K

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)*

The ESP increases the control over the vehicle in situations such as accelerating or in turns.

The ESP expands the functions of the ABS/TCS and decreases under any circumstance the risk of skidding. This contributes to an improved stability of the vehicle.

The system works in the realm of speed in relation to the ABS. In case of a failure of the ABS, the ESP will also fail.

The ESP connects automatically when the engine is switched on and checks itself.

If needed, the system can be switched on or off by pressing the button.

When the system is off, the ESP warning light will light up "Warning lights" chapter.

The ESP should always be connected. Only in exceptional cases, when the skidding effect is desired under extremely sporty conditions, the system can be disconnected.

Afterwards the system should be reconnected.

The ABS and EDS "Switches" chapter remain connected even when the ESP is off.

Functioning

The electronic stability program encompasses the ABS, EDS and TCS. In addition to all available data for these functions, the ESP control unit needs additional measurements supplied by high precision sensors. The measuring data consists of the speed at which the vehicle turns around its vertical axis, acceleration, pressure on brakes and the turn of the steering wheel.

With the help of the steering wheel sensor and the vehicles speed, the desired direction is determined and constantly compared to the vehicles real behavior. When differences occur, such as incipient skidding, the ESP automatically brakes the adequate wheel.

Driving style should always be modified to suit the traffic and road conditions. The greater safety provided by the TCS should not lead you to take greater risks.

WARNING

166 Intelligent technology

The vehicle stabilizes through the braking force on the wheel. If the vehicle swings out (tendency of the tail to swing out) the brakes will act on the exterior front wheel. In case the swerve is insufficient (tendency to leave the curve) the braking force will be exerted on the interior rear wheel The braking generates a noise.

Power steering

Do not keep the steering wheel fully turned more than 15 seconds when the engine is switched on, as the hydraulic oil will be heated to a high temperature by the servo pump.

This could damage the power steering system.

Furthermore every time you turn the steering wheel as far as it will go with the engine off, you will hear a series of noises made by the excessive effort of the servo pump. The engine tick over may also be reduced for a short time. K

The ESP cannot overcome physical limits. This must be borne in mind particularly on wet or icy roads.

The driving style must always be adapted to the road and traffic conditions. The increased safety offered by the ESP should not encourage one to take unnecessary risks. K

WARNING

167Your vehicle and the environment

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Your vehicle and the environment

The first 1,500 km and afterwards

Running-in

During the first few operating hours the engine internal friction is higher than later on when all the moving parts have bedded down. How well this running-in process is done depends to a considerable extent on the way the vehicle is driven during the first 1,500 km. K

Up to 1,000 kilometres

the following general rules apply:

Do not use full throttle

Do not drive faster than 3/4 of top speed

Avoid high engine speeds

Trailer towing should if possible be avoided.

From 1,000 1,500 km

The speed can be gradually increased to the road or engine maximum. K

During and after the running-in period the following applies:

Do not overrev the engine when cold either in neutral or in the gears.

All speeds and revs given are only valid when engine is properly warm.

For the sake of the environment

Do not drive with the engine speed unnecessarily high changing up early helps to save fuel, reduces noise and protects the environment "Environment friendly and economical driving" chapter.

Do not let engine labour change down when engine no longer runs smoothly. K

New tyres must also be run in because they do not have maximum adhesion at the start. This must be taken into account by driving carefully during the first 100 km.

New brake linings must also be run in and do not have the optimum friction properties during the first 200 km. The slightly reduced braking

WARNING

effect can be compensated for by more pressure on the brake pedal. This also applies when new linings have been fitted. K

WARNING (continued)

168 Your vehicle and the environment

After the running-in period

On vehicles with a rev counter* the maximum permissible engine speed is shown by the beginning of the red zone on the rev counter scale. The needle of the counter must not move into this zone.

Extremely high engine revs will be automatically governed. K

Cleaning the exhaust fumes

Description

The perfect functioning of the cleaning system for exhaust fumes is of great importance for the environment-friendly functioning of your vehicle.

Therefore, keep in mind the following points:

Versions with a catalytic converter must only use unleaded fuel "Filling the tank" chapter.

In vehicles with a catalytic converter never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty. Irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring, thus allowing unburned fuel into the exhaust system which can cause overheating and damage to the catalyst.

If you experience starting difficulties, loss of power or engine problems while driving, the cause could be a failure in the ignition.

In this case, fuel may be entering the exhaust system without burning and, in this way being released into the atmosphere. Furthermore, the catalyst could deteriorate due to overheating. Reduce speed immediately. Have this problem fixed at the nearest Technical Service Centre.

Do not overload the engine with oil "Engine oil" chapter.

Do not towstart the vehicle for more than 50 m "Tow start/towing" chapter.

Note

Even when the cleaning system for exhaust fumes is in perfect working order, under certain circumstances, the fumes may smell like sulfur.

This depends on the percentage of sulfur in the fuel.

Often it is sufficient to change brands or buy super unleaded. K

Due to possible high temperatures of the catalyst, do not park in places where the catalyst is easily exposed to inflammable material.

Do not use additional protection for the body or anticorrosive products for sumps and exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat shields. The above mentioned material could ignite while driving.

WARNING

169Your vehicle and the environment

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Environment-friendly and economical driving

General notes

Three factors determine the fuel consumption, the burden on the environment and the wear on the engine, brakes and tyres:

The personal driving style.

The individual conditions of the use of the car.

Technical prerequisites.

The fuel consumption can be reduced by 10 to 15 percent by adopting a thoughtful and economic driving style. This chapter will help you lower pollution and save money by following 10 suggestions. K

Suggestion 1. Thoughtful driving style

The highest fuel consumption takes place during acceleration. If you drive in a thoughtful manner you will have to brake less and, therefore, accelerate less. You can also let the vehicle roll, i.e. when you can foresee that the following traffic light will be red. K

Suggestion 2. Changing gears saves energy

Another way to save fuel is to change up as quickly as possible. If you drive with high engine revs the car will use up more energy.

The fig. 151 shows the relation between the consumption (l/100 km) and speed (km/h) in first, second, third, fourth and fifth gear.

The following rules may be helpful. Never drive more than a few meters in first gear. When you reach 2,000 revolutions, you should change up.

If you drive a vehicle with an automatic gearbox, press the accelerator pedal gently. Do not press it to the kick-down position. This way, a consumption oriented program is automatically selected. It changes up as soon as possible and takes longer to change down. K

30 50 70 km/h

90

l/100km 1.

2. 3.

4. 5.

B45-354P Fig. 151

170 Your vehicle and the environment

Suggestion 3. Avoid driving at maximum speed

Try not to drive at maximum speed. The increase of fuel consumption, exhaust pollution and noise is disproportionate at high speeds.

The illustration shows the relation between consumption (l/100 km) and speed (km/h) fig. 152.

If only about 3 quarters of top speed is utilized, the fuel consumption will be reduced by about half.

Suggestion 4. Decrease idling

It is worth switching off1) the engine in traffic jams, at railroad crossings and at traffic lights with a long red light. The savings in fuel after 30-40 seconds with the engine switched off is higher than the fuel used to switch the engine on again. K

Suggestion 5. Periodic revisions

Your fuel savings are guaranteed even before going on a trip with periodic revisions by your Technical Service Centre. Proper engine maintenance is not only a safety and maintenance issue but also a fuel consumption issue.

Poor fine tuning of the engine may increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Check the oil level every time you fill up. The oil consumption depends largely on the engine load. Depending on the driving style, the oil consumption can be up to 1.0 l/1000 km.

Another suggestion: You can also lower oil consumption by using synthetic oils. K

km/h max

l/100km

B45-355P Fig. 152

1) Statutory regulations must be respected.

Driving at high speeds decreases road safety. K

WARNING

171Your vehicle and the environment

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Suggestion 6. Avoid short drives

The engine and the catalytic converter must reach its optimum functioning temperature in order to effectively reduce consumption and toxic gas emissions.

The fuel consumption of a cold engine of a normal vehicle right after the start is about 30-40 liters per 100 km. After about one kilometer the consumption decreases to 20 liters. After about four kilometers the engine has warmed up and the consumption is normal. For this reason, it is important to avoid short drives and heating the vehicles engine when the vehicle is not moving. Drive on quickly!

The ambient temperature also counts. The illustration shows the difference in consumption (l/100km) for the same distance (km) at +20C and 10C. Your vehicles consumption is higher in the summer than in the winter fig. 153. K

Suggestion 7. Check the tyre pressure

Make sure that the tyres have always adequate pressure. Even half a bar less increases the level of fuel consumption by 5 percent. If the pressure is not correct, the tyres wear out faster due to an excessive deformation and overheating which, in turn, will decrease the driving performance.

Always check the tyre pressure when the tyre is cold.

In addition, do not drive year round with winter tyres. They make more noise and increase fuel consumption by 10 percent. Change to summer tyres on time. K

Suggestion 8. Avoid unnecessary weight

Apart from driving habits and periodic revisions of your vehicle, there are other ways to reduce fuel consumption:

Avoid unnecessary weight

Every kilogram increases fuel consumption. For this reason, it is worth checking your boot to avoid unnecessary weight.

Frequently, the roof rack will stay on the roof even though it is no longer needed. Due to greater air resistance, an unloaded roof rack at a speed of 100-120 km/h increases the consumption by approx. 12%. K

5

+20C

10C

15 25 km

30

l/100km

B45-356P Fig. 153

172 Your vehicle and the environment

Suggestion 9. Save electricity

The alternator generates electricity while driving. The more electricity is used, the higher the fuel consumption.

The heated rear window, extra lights, the heater fan and air conditioning* use a large amount of energy. The heated rear window creates a consumption of approx. one liter for every 10 hours.

For this reason, disconnect electrical consumers as soon as they are no longer needed. The alternator generates electricity when the engine is running. K

Suggestion 10. Written check-up

If you wish to reduce fuel consumption keep a trip book. It is not much work and is worth while since it allows you to detect possible consumption variations (positive or negative) on time and intervene, if necessary. If you detect an increase in consumption you should examine the driving conditions since the last filling. K

173Your vehicle and the environment

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Trailer towing

What do you need to bear in mind when towing a trailer?

The vehicle is intended mainly for the transportation of persons and luggage but it can, with the appropriate technical equipment, also be used to tow a trailer.

Technical requirements

If the vehicle is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket, all that is technically and legally necessary for trailer towing will have been taken into account.

If the trailer to be towed has a 7-pin plug, you can use an adapter cable obtained in any Technical Service Centre.

If the vehicle is fitted with a towing bracket at a later date, this must be done according to the manufacturers instructions.

Fixing points for tow bar*

Danger of accident!

We recommend that you leave the fitting of a tow hook to a Technical Service Centre. K

WARNING

Fig. 154

A

A

B 980

A AL0-125

174 Your vehicle and the environment

A 6 mounting points

B at least 65 mm

All dimensions in mm.

Technical Service Centres are fully equipped with the necessary information and expertise for the retrofitting of towing devices and the concurrent requirements for reinforcing the cooling system. For these reasons, it is best to have the fitting done by a Technical Service Centre. K

Driving tips

The towing device is a safety element and you should therefore only use a device specifically designed for your vehicle and which is duly approved.

Operations instructions

The removable ball coupling of the towing bracket* may be stored in the right-hand rear of the boot.

Additional mirrors are required if the traffic behind the trailer is not visible with the exterior mirrors fitted as standard. Both exterior mirrors must be attached to brackets in such a way that a sufficient field of vision to the rear is guaranteed at all times.

The permitted trailer weight must not be exceeded under any circumstances chapter Technical Data.

When using a trailer on mountain routes you must bear in mind that the tow loads given in the Technical data chapter are only

applicable for slopes of 10% to 12%. If you do not use the full tow load you may drive up steeper slopes.

The given trailer weights are only applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level. As the engine output drops due to the decreasing air density, the climbing ability must also be reduced by 10% for each further 1000 m.

Where possible make full use of the maximum permissible drawbar weight on the ball of the towing bracket but do not exceed it chapter Technical Data.

While observing the permissible trailer and drawbar weight, distribute the load in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near as possible to the axle. The objects must also be secured so that they cannot slip about.

The tyre pressures on the towing vehicle must be adjusted for full load conditions, and also check the pressures on the trailer.

Headlight settings should be checked, with the trailer attached, before beginning the journey and adjusted as necessary.

On vehicles with headlight beam control it is only necessary to turn the knurled disc on the dash board in the appropriate direction.

Driving instructions

To obtain the best possible handling of vehicle and trailer, the following should be noted:

Try to avoid driving with an unladen vehicle and a loaded trailer. If this cannot be avoided, only drive slowly to allow for the unfavourable weight distribution.

175Your vehicle and the environment

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

As driving stability of vehicle and trailer decreases when the speed increases do not drive at the maximum permissible top speed in unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions particularly when going downhill.

In any case the speed must be reduced as soon as the trailer shows the slightest sign of snaking. On no account try to stop the snaking by accelerating.

For safety reasons one should not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). This also applies in countries where higher speeds are permitted.

Always brake in good time. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at first then firmly. This will avoid the jerking caused by the trailer wheels locking.

Change down before going down a steep hill so that the engine can act as a brake.

When a long climb in a low gear with extremely high engine revs must be negotiated at exceptionally high ambient temperatures the coolant temperature gauge must be observed. When the gauge needle moves to the right end of the scale, the road speed must be reduced immediately.

The cooling effect of the radiator fan cannot be increased by changing down, because the speed of the fan is not dependent on the engine speed. One should therefore not change down even when towing a trailer as long as the engine can cope without the vehicle speed dropping too much. K

General notes

During the running in period you should avoid towing a trailer if possible.

It is advisable to have the vehicle serviced between the Inspection intervals if it is used frequently for towing a trailer.

The trailer and drawbar load figures on the data plate of the towing bracket are for test certification only. The correct figures for the vehicle, which may be lower than the above figures, are given in the vehicle documents and in this manual.

When using the towing device the cars empty weight is reduced, and as a result its effective load is decreased.

Observe all statutory requirements regarding the use of a trailer. K

176 Your vehicle and the environment

Driving abroad

Observations

If the vehicle is to be taken abroad, the following must also be borne in mind:

If the vehicle has a petrol engine and catalytic converter, one must ensure that unleaded petrol will be available during the journey "Filling the tank" chapter. The automobile clubs offer information about the unleaded filling station network.

In some countries it is possible that a vehicle model is sold under conditions where some spare parts are not available or that the Technical Services may only carry out limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the technical preparation of your vehicle in addition to necessary maintenance and repair possibilities. K

Headlight covering

When traveling abroad in a country where driving is on the opposite side to the home country, asymmetric headlights will dazzle oncoming traffic.

To prevent this, headlights must be adjusted or some areas must be covered with an opaque adhesive strip depending on the model. For more information, contact your Technical Service Centre. K

177Care and maintenance

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Care and maintenance

Care of the vehicle

Regular and expert care helps to maintain the value of the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

When buying car care materials one should select products which do not damage the environment. Empty containers which these materials were in do not belong with household waste. K

Washing

The best protection against environmental influences is frequent washing and use of the right waxing product.

How often this treatment is required depends, amongst other things on how much the vehicle is used, how it is parked (garage, in open under trees etc.), the seasons, weather conditions and environmental influences.

The longer bird droppings, insects, tree resin, road and industrial grime, tar spots, soot, road salt and other aggressive materials remain on the vehicle paint the more lasting their destructive effect will be. High temperatures e.g. from strong sunlight intensifies the corrosive effect.

In certain circumstances weekly washing can be necessary, in other conditions monthly washing with appropriate waxing may be fully adequate.

After the period when salt is put on the roads the underside of the vehicle should always be washed thoroughly.

Automatic car washes

The vehicle paint is sufficiently durable for the vehicle to be washed in an automatic car wash without problem. Naturally, the effect on the paint depends largely on the design of the car wash, the filtering of the wash water, the type of wash and care material, etc.

If misused, car care materials can be harmful to health.

Car care materials must always be stored in a safe place where they are out of reach of children.

WARNING

Dampness and ice in the brake system can have a negative effect on the braking power.

WARNING

178 Care and maintenance

Note

Before going through the car wash, apart from the usual precautions (closing windows and sliding roof).

You do not need to remove the Original roof aerial.

If there are special fittings on the vehicle e.g. spoilers, roof rack, two- way radio aerial it is best to speak to the car wash operator. K

Washing the vehicle by hand

For the sake of the environment

In the interests of environmental protection the vehicle should only be washed in specially provided wash bays. In some districts, washing cars elsewhere may even be forbidden.

First soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse off as well as possible. Then clean the car with a soft sponge, glove or brush starting on the roof and going from top to bottom using only slight pressure especially when cleaning the headlight area. Paint shampoo, preferably with a neutral pH, should only be used for very persistent dirt. Rinse the sponge or glove out thoroughly at short intervals.

Wheels and sill panels should be cleaned last, using a different sponge if possible.

After cleaning the vehicle, rinse thoroughly with water and leather it off.

Note

The vehicle should not be washed in strong sunshine.

If the vehicle is rinsed with a hose, do not direct the jet of water at the lock cylinders and the door/boot lid/tailgate shut lines they can freeze up in the winter. K

Washing vehicle with high pressure cleaner

The operating instructions for the high pressure cleaner must be followed closely particularly with regard to pressure and working distance.

Do not use a concentrated jet.

The water temperature must not be above 60C.

Conservation

Regular application of protection products protects the vehicle paintwork to a large extent against the environmental influences listed under Washing on the previous page and even against light mechanical damage.

At the latest when water on the clean paint does not form small drops and roll off, the vehicle should be protected by applying a coat of good hard wax. Even when a wax solution is used regularly

Tyres must never be cleaned with a concentrated jet! Even at a relatively large working distance and a very short spraying time, damage can occur. K

WARNING

179Care and maintenance

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

in the washing water it is advisable to protect the paint with a coat of hard wax at least twice a year. K

Polishing

Should only be done if paint has lost its shine and gloss cannot be brought back with wax. If the polish used does not contain preservative compounds, the paint must be waxed afterwards.

Note

Matt painted and plastic parts should not be treated with polish or hard wax. K

Paint damage

Small marks in the paint such as scratches or stone damage should be touched up immediately with paint before the metal starts to rust.

However, should rust be found at any time it must be removed thoroughly and then the area treated first with an anti-corrosion primer and then the correct paint applied.

The number of the original vehicle paint is given on the data sticker which is inside the boot in the spare wheel housing. K

Windows

Remove snow and ice from windows and mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To avoid scratches due to dirt on the glass, the scraper should only be pushed in one direction and not moved to and fro.

Traces of rubber, oil, wax1), grease or silicone can be removed with a window cleaning solution or a silicone remover.

The windows should also be cleaned on the inside at regular intervals.

Do not dry the windows with the leather used for the paintwork because traces of paint cleaner will cause streaks to appear on the glass, which will hinder vision.

To avoid damaging the heating element wires in the rear window do not put stickers over the wires on the inside. K

Door, boot and window seals

The weatherstrips will remain flexible and last longer if they are rubbed lightly with a rubber protective compound from time to time. This will also stop the weatherstrips from freezing on in winter. K

Door lock cylinder

You should only use an appropriate spray, which has lubricating and anti-corrosive qualities, to de-ice the lock cylinder. K

1) This wax residue can only be removed with a special cleaner. Your Technical Service Centre will provide you with more detailed information.

180 Care and maintenance

Plastic parts and leatherette

Exterior plastic parts are cleaned with normal washing and interior parts with a damp cloth. If this is not sufficient, these parts and leatherette may only be cleaned with special plastic cleaners that are free from alcohol and other solvents.

Note

The use of liquid air conditioners directly over the air vents of the vehicle may damage the plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled over them. K

Upholstery cloth and textile trim

Upholstery cloth and textile trim on door panels, parcel shelves, luggage compartment covers, headlining etc. must be cleaned with special cleaners or dry foam and a soft brush. K

Natural leather*

Leather should, depending on usage, be treated from time to time in accordance with the following instructions. It must be noted that on no account may solvents, floor wax, shoe polish, spot removers and similar products be used for this purpose.

To clean leather a cotton or woollen cloth lightly moistened with water should be used for the dirty surfaces.

Dirtier areas may be cleaned with a mild soap solution (2 dessert spoonfuls of neutral soap to 1 litre of water). Make sure that the leather is not made too wet and that no water seeps through the seams. After cleaning, wipe dry with a soft cloth.

Furthermore we recommend that, with normal usage, the leather is treated at half yearly intervals with a special leather care agent. Apply one coat and clean off with a soft cloth once it has taken effect. K

Cleaning seat belts

Keep belts clean. They may not retract properly if very dirty.

Dirty belts can be cleaned by washing with a mild soap solution without taking the belts out of the vehicle.

Caution

Inertia reel belts should be completely dry before they are allowed to roll up.

The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning.

Do not have the belts cleaned chemically because the cleaning compounds damage the webbing material. Ensure that the belts do not come into contact with corrosive fluids.

You should check the condition of your seat belts regularly. If you find any damage to the belt webbing, belt connections, the belt retractor or the locking parts, the belt in question must be replaced by a Technical Service Centre. K

WARNING

181Care and maintenance

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Steel wheels

The wheels and the wheel trims should be cleaned thoroughly at regular intervals when the vehicle is being washed. This will prevent brake dust, dirt and road salt from accumulating on the wheel. Persistent ingrained brake dust can be removed with an industrial grime remover. Paint damage should be repaired before rust can form. K

Alloy wheels*

In order to maintain the smart appearance of alloy wheels for a long period, regular care is necessary. In particular, salt and brake pad dust must be washed off thoroughly at least every two weeks otherwise the surface of the alloy will be damaged. After being washed, the wheels should be treated with an acid-free cleaner for alloy wheels. About every three months it is necessary to give wheels a good rubbing with hard wax. Paint polish or other abrasive solutions must not be used. If the protective paint coat has been damaged, e.g. by stone impact, the damaged spots should be dealt with as soon as possible.

Cleaning and anti-corrosion treatment of engine compartment

The leaves, blossoms etc. which drop into the water box (underneath the engine bonnet in front of the windscreen) should be cleaned out occasionally. This will prevent the water drain holes from becoming blocked and on vehicles without a dust and pollen filter foreign bodies entering the vehicle interior via the heating and ventilation system.

The engine compartment and the outside surface of the power unit are given anti-corrosion treatment at the factory.

In the winter when the vehicle is being driven frequently on salted roads, good anti-corrosion treatment is very important. For this reason the entire engine compartment and the plenum chamber should be thoroughly cleaned before and after the salting period and then preserved so that the salt cannot have a damaging effect.

The ignition must be switched off before washing the engine.

Do not point the water jet directly at the headlights to avoid damage.

Please note when cleaning the wheels that dampness, ice and grit can have a negative effect on the braking power. K

WARNING

Before working in the engine compartment, read the notes in the "Engine compartment" chapter.

For safety reasons pull out ignition key before reaching into the water box. Otherwise if the windscreen wipers are switched on unintentionally the movement of the wiper link could cause injury.

WARNING

182 Care and maintenance

If the engine compartment is cleaned at any time with grease removing solutions1) or if one has the engine washed, the anti- corrosion compound is nearly always removed as well. It is therefore essential to ask for durable preservation of all surfaces, seams, joints and components in the engine compartment to be carried out. This applies also when corrosion protected parts are renewed.

For the sake of the environment

Because when washing the engine petrol, grease and oil deposits are washed off, the dirty water must be cleaned by an oil separator. For this reason engine washing should only be carried out in a workshop or filling station. K

Undercoating

The underside of the vehicle is coated with a special compound to protect it from corrosion and damage.

However, as this protective layer becomes damaged when the vehicle is in use, the protective coating under the body and on the running gear should be examined at defined intervals preferably before and after the winter season and any damage made good.

Note for vehicles with a catalytic converter

Due to the high temperatures which occur in the afterburning process, additional heat shields are fitted over the catalytic converter. Underbody sealant must not be applied to these shields, the catalytic converter or the exhaust pipes. Removal of the heat shields is also not permissible. K

Cavity preservation

All cavities on the vehicle which could be susceptible to corrosion are given permanent protection at the factory.

This coating does not need checking or any subsequent treatment. Should a small amount of wax run out of the cavities at high ambient temperatures it can be removed with a plastic scraper and some white spirit.

For the sake of the environment

If the wax which has run out is removed with clean petrol, heed the environmental protection regulations. K

1) Only the correct cleaning solutions should be used on no account petrol or Diesel.

Never use additional under floor protection or anti-corrosion agents for the exhaust silencer, exhaust pipe, catalysts or heat shields. These substances could ignite whilst the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

183Checking and refilling

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Checking and refilling

Engine bonnet

Opening the bonnet

To release lock, pull lever on left under instrument panel the bonnet springs up out of its lock.

Note

Before opening the bonnet ensure that the wiper arms are not lifted off the windscreen. Otherwise damage can occur to the paintwork.

To open the bonnet, lift slightly and press the safety catch in the direction of the arrow fig. 156.

Fig. 155

Fig. 156

ALO-126

AL0-127

184 Checking and refilling

Engine compartment

Caution

When topping up fluids do not confuse them with each other under any circumstances, otherwise serious functional defects may occur.

For the sake of the environment

The ground underneath the vehicle should be checked regularly. If spots caused by oil or other fluids can be seen, the vehicle should be taken to a Technical Service Centre for checking. K

Particular care should be taken when working in the engine compartment!

Switch off engine, remove ignition key.

Pull handbrake on firmly.

Move gear lever into neutral or, in automatic gearboxes, in P position.

Allow engine to cool off.

As long as the engine is at operating temperature:

Do not put your hand into the radiator fan, it could switch on suddenly.

Do not open the radiator cap because the cooling system is under pressure.

WARNING

Never spill any liquids over the hot engine. These liquids could ignite.

Avoid causing short circuits in the electrical system particularly at the battery.

If tests have to be carried out with the engine running, take into account that there is an additional danger present from rotating parts e.g. ribbed belts, generator, radiator fan etc. and from the high voltage ignition system.

If work on the fuel or electrical system is necessary:

Disconnect the battery from the vehicle electrics

Do not smoke

Never work near naked flames

Always keep a fire extinguisher in the vicinity.

Attention must be paid to the warnings given in this Manual and to the generally applicable safety regulations.

WARNING (continued)

For safety reasons the bonnet should always be properly closed when the vehicle is moving. Always check therefore after closing the bonnet that the lock is engaged. This is the case when the bonnet is flush with the adjacent body panels.

If you should notice that the lock is not engaged, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet. K

WARNING

185Checking and refilling

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

85 kW Petrol engine

Page

1 Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

2 Oil filler opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

3 Brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

4 Battery cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

5 Coolant expansion tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

6 Windscreen washer container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 K

Fig. 157

1 2 3

6

5 4

AL0-044

186 Checking and refilling

Engine oil

Specifications

The engine comes with a special, high quality, multi grade oil that can be used in all seasons of the year except for those regions affected by extreme cold.

As the use of high quality oil is essential for the correct operation of the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or replacement is necessary use only those oils that conform to the requirements of the VW standards.

If it is not possible to find oil conforming to the VW standards then oil conforming to the ACEA or API standards with an appropriate viscosity at atmospheric temperature should be used instead. The use of this type of oil may have some repercussions on the performance of the engine for example, long starting time, increased consumption and a higher emission level.

If a top up is required then different oils may be mixed as long as they all conform to the VW standards.

The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should appear on the container of the service oil; the container will display together the different standards for petrol and diesel engines, the oil can be used for both types of engines. K

Oil properties

Viscosity

The viscosity class is selected according to the diagram above. If atmospheric temperature falls outside of the described limits for only a short period then an oil change is not necessary.

B1H-149 Fig. 158

187Checking and refilling

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Petrol engine

Diesel engine

Mono-grade oil

Mono-grade oils cannot be used throughout the whole year due to their limited range of viscosity2).

These oils are only useful in a climate that is constantly very cold or very warm.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the guarantee.

Note

Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle. In this way the required oil will be available if needed. K

Denomination Specification Comments

A synthetic oil VW 502 00 / Dated after VW 500 00 1-97

B mineral oil VW 501 01 Dated after 1-97

A/B multi-grade oil ACEA A2 or A3 or Dated after even API SH/SJ 1-97

Denomination Specification Comments

A synthetic oil VW 505 011) Dated after 1-97

B mineral oil VW 505 00 Dated after 1-97

A/B multi-grade oil ACEA A2 or A3 or Dated after even API CD/CF 1-97

1) Diesel engines that have fuel injection based on a fuel injector pump should use only oil specification VW 505 01. Avoid the use of any other oil type than VW 505 01 for this engine. Warning! Possible engine damage!

2) Viscosity: Oil density

188 Checking and refilling

Checking oil level

Every engine uses a certain amount of oil. The oil consumption can be up to 1.0 litres per 1000 km. The engine oil level must therefore be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a long journey.

The location of the dipstick A can be determined from the illustration on page 185.

The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the oil level. After stopping engine wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back to the sump.

Then pull the dipstick out, wipe it with a clean cloth and insert again.

Then pull dipstick out again and check the oil level:

a Oil must be topped up. Afterwards it suffices when the oil level is somewhere in area b .

b Oil can be topped up. It can then happen that the oil level is in area c .

c Oil must not be topped up.

When the engine is working hard such as in sustained high-speed motorway cruising in summer, when towing a trailer or when climbing mountain passes, the oil level should be kept at area c

not above. K

Topping up engine oil

Unscrew the cap from oil filler opening B and pour oil in 0.5 litres at a time. Then check level with the dipstick.

On no account should the oil level be above area c . Otherwise oil can be drawn into the engine via the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the exhaust system. On vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter, the oil could burn inside the converter causing it to become damaged.

Carefully close the filler cap and push the oil dipstick in as far as possible, this will prevent oil spill when the engine is running. K

Fig. 159

When topping up the oil, do not spill it onto hot engine components danger of fire.

WARNING

a

b

c

A

B

AL0-045

189Checking and refilling

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Changing engine oil

The engine oil must be changed at the intervals given in the Inspection and Maintenance Plan. We therefore recommend that the oil change be done by a Technical Service Centre.

For the sake of the environment

On no account should oil be poured down drains or into the earth. Because of the disposal problems, the necessary special tools and specialist knowledge required the engine oil and filter changing should preferably be done by a Technical Service Center.

Caution

No additives should be mixed with the engine oil. K

Cooling system

Coolant specifications

The cooling system is filled at the factory with a permanent coolant which is not changed. The coolant consists of water and a 40% concentration of our coolant additive G12+ (glycol-based anti- freeze with anti-corrosion additives). This mixture not only gives the necessary frost protection down to 25 C but also protects the alloy parts in the cooling system against corrosion. In addition it prevents scaling and significantly raises the boiling point of the coolant.

The concentration of the coolant therefore must not be reduced in the summer or in warm countries, by topping up with plain water. The coolant additive proportion must be at least 40%.

If greater protection against frost is required, the proportion of G12+ additive can be increased, but only up to 60% (frost protection to approx. 40 C), otherwise the anti-freeze protection is reduced and furthermore the cooling effect is impaired.

Vehicles for export to cold countries (e.g. Sweden, Norway, Finland) usually have frost protection down to 35 C (50% G12+) approximately.

Other additives can be very detrimental to the anti-corrosion effect in particular.

The subsequent corrosion damage can lead to coolant loss resulting in major engine damage.

If you want to change the engine oil yourself, you must note the following points:

Allow the engine to cool down first to avoid the danger of being scalded by hot engine oil.

Use an appropriate container to drain off the oil. It should be big enough to hold the quantity of oil in your engine.

Wear protective glasses for your eyes.

When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm horizontal so that the oil being drained cannot run down your arm.

If your hands come into contact with engine oil you must wash them thoroughly afterwards.

Old oil must be stored out of reach of children until it is disposed of in the correct manner.

WARNING

190 Checking and refilling

Caution

Only our G12+ (purple colour) should be used as an antifreeze additive. Observe the notice on the container. The cooling liquid may be purchased in Technical Services.

The antifreeze additive G12+ can be mixed with other additives (G11 and G12).

The additive G12 (red colour) should never be mixed with G11. K

Checking coolant level

The level can only be checked properly when the engine is not running.

The coolant level must be between the max and min marks on the expansion tank when engine is cold and can be slightly above the max mark when it is warm. K

Coolant losses

Coolant loss normally indicates leaks in the system. In this case the cooling system should be checked by a Technical Service Center without delay. It is not sufficient merely to add coolant.

In a sealed system losses can only occur if the boiling point of the coolant is exceeded as a result of overheating, and coolant is forced out of the system. K

Topping up coolant

Switch engine off and let it cool down. Then cover expansion tank cap with a cloth and turn cap carefully anti-clockwise and remove.

No other coolant may be used if G12+ is not available. In this case only water can be used and the correct mixture concentration must be restored with the specified coolant additive (see previous page) as soon as possible.

Fig. 160

Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant leaving the engine compartment Risk of scalding! Wait until no more steam or coolant can be seen.

WARNING

Do not remove expansion tank cap when engine is hot danger of scalding:

System is under pressure.

WARNING

AL0-046

191Checking and refilling

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

If a lot of coolant has been lost, only add cold coolant after the engine has cooled down. This will prevent engine damage.

Do not fill above the max mark.

The excess coolant will be forced out through the pressure relief valve in the cap when engine becomes hot.

Screw cap on again tightly.

For the sake of the environment

Drained coolant should not normally be reused, it must be disposed of, bearing in mind environmental protection regulations. K

Radiator fan

The radiator fan is driven electrically and controlled by a thermoswitch from the coolant temperature (also from the engine compartment temperature on some models).

Brake fluid

The brake fluid reservoir is on the left hand side of the engine compartment.

On vehicles with ABS* the reservoir is in the same place but its design is different.

Note

On vehicles with right-hand drive the reservoir is on the other side of the engine compartment. K

The coolant additive and the coolant are a danger to health.

The additive must therefore only be stored in the original container well out of reach of children. If the coolant has to be drained at any time it must be caught and also stored in a safe place.

WARNING

After the engine has been stopped the fan can continue running for a while even with the engine switched off (up to about 10 minutes). It can also start to run again suddenly after a short time if

the coolant temperature increases due to heat build up

when the engine is hot and the engine compartment is heated additionally by strong sunlight.

Special care must therefore be taken when working in the engine compartment. K

WARNING

192 Checking and refilling

Checking fluid level

The fluid level must always be between the MAX and MIN marks to ensure perfect operation.

The level of fluid tends to sink slightly when the vehicle is used due to the automatic adjustment of brake linings. This is quite normal.

If the level sinks noticeably in a short time or drops below the MIN mark, however, the system may be leaking. A low fluid level in the reservoir is indicated by the brake warning lamp lighting up Warning lamps chapter. Go to a Technical Service Centre immediately and have the brake system checked. K

Renewing the brake fluid

Brake fluid absorbs moisture. In the course of time it takes in water from the atmosphere. Too high a content of water in the brake fluid system can cause corrosion damage. Furthermore the boiling point of the brake fluid is reduced considerably. For this reason the brake fluid must be renewed every two years.

Only our genuine brake fluid should be used (specification according to US FM VSS 116 DOT 4 Standard). The fluid must be new.

Caution

Remember also that brake fluid will attack the paintwork.

Fig. 161

When the brake fluid becomes too old, vapour bubbles can form in the brake system when the brakes are used vigorously. The efficiency of the brakes and thus the vehicle safety are seriously reduced.

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous! It must therefore only be stored in the closed original container out of reach of children.

WARNING

AL0-047

193Checking and refilling

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

For the sake of the environment

Because of the disposal problems, the special tools necessary and the specialist knowledge required, brake fluid should preferably be changed at a Technical Service Centre.

It is advisable to have the fluid change done during an Inspection Service. K

Battery

Warnings on handling the battery

Wear eye protection

Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and eye protection!

Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited!

A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off when the battery is under charge.

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

Wear eye protection. Do not allow particles containing acid or lead to come into contact with the eyes, skin or clothes.

Battery acid is highly caustic. Always wear protective gloves and glasses. Do not tip battery acid can spill out of the vents.

Should acid come into contact with the eyes, rinse for several minutes using clean running water. Seek medical assistance immediately. Should acid come into contact with skin or clothes, neutralise immediately using an alkaline soap solution and rinse throughly. Should acid inadvertently be drunk, seek medical attention immediately.

Keep well clear of naked flame and sparks. Do not smoke. Avoid generating sparks when handling cables and electrical components.

Avoid short circuits. Never short battery terminals danger of injury from high energy sparks.

When battery is being charged, a highly explosive mixture of gasses is produced.

Keep acid and battery out of the reach of children.

Disconnect positive terminal of battery before doing any work on the electrical system. When changing bulbs it is sufficient to switch the lamps off.

When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system first disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

The battery must not be disconnected with the engine running, as this will damage the electrical system (electronic components).

When reconnecting the battery, first connect the positive cable, then the negative. On no acount may the cable be interchanged. Risk of cables burning!

WARNING

194 Checking and refilling

Caution

Do not disconnect the vehicle battery when the ignition is on or when the engine is running, as the electrical system (electronic components) could otherwise be damaged.

In order to protect the casing from UV radiation, do not expose vehicle battery to direct sunlight. K

Location

The battery is in the engine compartment.

To start with the help of another battery "Emergency starting" chapter. K

Checking acid level

Please refer to the warning notes in the chapter "Engine compartment" before starting any type of work on the engine or the engine compartment.

The acid/electrolyte level should be checked regularly in the following cases:

high mileage

in countries with a warm climate

old battery

The battery is otherwise service-free.

The acid level should always be around the max. mark on the longside of the battery. It should never be filled above the max. mark nor be allowed to drop below the min. mark.

We recommend that the electrolyte level be checked and corrected by a Technical Service Centre.

Battery with a magic eye*

A round viewing window is located on the upper side of the battery arrow, fig. 162. This magic eye will change its color according to the charge condition or the acid level of the battery.

Air bubbles can distort the true color. You should, therefore, tap carefully on the magic eye.

If the display in the viewing window has no color or is light yellow, the acid level in the battery is too low. Distilled water must be added. We recommend that the battery be replaced if it is older than 5 years.

We recommend that the electrolyte level be checked and corrected by a Technical Service Centre. KFig. 162AL0-048

195Checking and refilling

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Long-term parking of the vehicle

If you will not use the vehicle for more than 4 weeks you should disconnect the negative terminal of the battery. If not the battery will discharge due to the consumers which will be activated when the vehicle is parked such as the immobilizer and the battery will need to be recharged.

Note

Take note of the warnings on page 193 when working on the battery. K

Winter driving

Caution

If the vehicle will be stationary for a longer period of time protect the battery from icing to avoid thawing and damage.

Charging the battery

Before charging switch off engine and all electrical consumers.

When charging with a low current (i.e. with a small battery charger) it is generally not necessary to take off the battery cables. Instructions from the battery charger manufacturer must, however, be followed.

Before quick charging, that is charging with high current, both cables must be disconnected.

We recommend not to use a thawed battery as the battery housing could have split inside due to ice formation and acid may leak out.

When charging battery do not remove caps.

The main cables of the charger should only be connected once the charger clips have been properly secured to the battery terminals.

Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .= positive

Black, brown or blue . . . .= negative

After charging the battery first switch off the charger and disconnect the main cable. Then disconnect the charger clips from the battery.

Keep children away from the battery, battery acid and the charger.

Only charge battery in a well ventilated room. Do not smoke and avoid naked flames or electric sparks as a highly explosive gas is produced while charging the battery.

Protect your eyes and face. Do not bend over the battery.

Should acid come in contact with the eyes or skin, rinse for several minutes with water. Seek medical assistance immediately.

Fast charging a battery is dangerous and should only be done at a Technical Service Centre, as special equipment and skills are needed.

Never charge a frozen battery. Risk of explosion! Even when thawed it continues to be dangerous as acid may leak which is corrosive. If the battery freezes replace it.

WARNING

196 Checking and refilling

Check acid level of the battery "Battery chapter". Depending on the technique used while charging battery acid could vaporize. K

If the battery is disconnected and then reconnected...

Please note the warnings from the "Engine compartment" chapter and following ones, before undergoing any work on the engine or engine compartment.

After disconnecting or charging the battery you should:

To reset the clock "Instruments" chapter.

Switch on again the automatic opening and closing of the power windows "Electrical powered windows" chapter.

Should you have problems with the starting or idling of a petrol engine start engine as follows: switch on ignition for approximately 30 seconds and switch off again. Start engine. K

Change battery

Our batteries have been developed to suit their location and have built-in safety elements. Original SEAT batteries comply with all maintenance, performance and safety requirements for your vehicle.

We recommend using a battery that does not require maintenance.

Please note the warnings from the "Engine compartment" chapter and following ones, before undergoing any work on the engine or engine compartment.

For the sake of the environment

Because of the problem of disposing of the old battery, the renewal should preferably done at a Technical Service Centre. Batteries contain, amongst other things, sulphuric acid and lead and must on no account be put with normal household waste. K

197Checking and refilling

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Windscreen washer

Location

The fluid container is on the left in the engine compartment. It holds about 3.5 liters; in vehicles with a headlight washer system* it holds about 6 liters.

The rear windshield* has its own container located in the engine compartment. K

Filling the container

You need to add a window cleaning solution with a wax remover to the water. There are several appropriate products, containing isopropilic alcohol or methylated spirits with wax dissolving properties (with anti-freeze additive in winter) on the market, because plain water is not usually sufficient to clean the glass and headlight lenses quickly and thoroughly. The mixing ratios on the window cleaner packaging must be adhered to.

Even when heated windscreen washer jets* are fitted, a window cleaning solution containing anti-freeze should be added to the water in the winter.

Caution

To avoid a possible error by the fluid level sensor, the proportion of alcohol and water should be 35% alcohol and 65% water approximately.

We recommend you contact a Technical Service Centre for further advice.

Under no circumstances should you add coolant anti-freeze or other additives. K

Fig. 163AL0-051

198 Checking and refilling

Adjusting washer jets

The jet for the rear window washer is in the wiper shaft. The water jet should hit the glass in the centre of the wiped area.

The jets for the windscreen washer and headlight washers* can only be adjusted with a special tool. When adjustment is necessary, contact your Technical Service Centre. K

Fig. 164AL0-129

199Servicing and replacing

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Servicing and replacing

Accessories, modifications and replacement of parts

Accessories and parts

Your vehicle is built in accordance with the most modern principles of safety technology and offers therefore a high degree of active and passive safety. To ensure that this remains so the vehicle as supplied by the factory may not be modified without careful thought. The following points must be noted if the vehicle is to be subsequently fitted with accessories, technically modified or have parts renewed later on:

Before buying accessories or carrying out technical modifications, the advice of the Technical Service should be considered.

Approved accessories and original SEAT spare parts may be obtained through the Technical Services who will also, naturally, carry out the corresponding assembly in the required conditions.

Appliances which have been retrofitted and have a direct influence on the drivers control of the vehicle e.g. cruise control system or electronically controlled shock absorber systems must have the e1) symbol and be authorised for that vehicle.

Additionally connected electric consumers e.g. refrigerators, horns, fans etc. which are not directly linked to the control of the vehicle must carry the CE symbol2).

If technical modifications are to be made, our guidelines must be observed. This is to ensure that no damage occurs to the vehicle, the traffic and operating safety is retained and that the modifications are permissible. K

1) e European Community authorisation symbol.

2) CE Manufacturer conformity declaration in the European Community.

3) Not available in all countries.

We inform you that expressly approved SEAT3) accessories and Genuine SEAT parts are available for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and suitability of those parts and accessories have been especially adapted for your vehicle.

Despite continuous market observation we cannot assess or accept responsibility for other products, even in cases where an officially recognised permit has been issued.

Accessories such as telephone retainers or drinks holders must never be attached to the Air Bag covers or within their area of effectiveness. They could cause injury if the Air Bag is activated during an accident!

WARNING

200 Servicing and replacing

Spark plugs

The spark plugs are renewed during the SEAT Inspection Service.

If the spark plugs have to be renewed between the Inspection Services, the following should be noted:

The spark plugs and ignition system have been matched to the engine and as such contribute to reducing the levels of exhaust pollutants. To avoid faulty operation, engine damage and even the withdrawal of permission to circulate due to excessive emissions values or non-suppressed spark plugs, only use the Genuine spark plugs for the respective engine in question. It is particularly important to examine the number of electrodes, the heat value and if necessary, the anti-parasitic.

For technical reasons, plugs may be modified at short notice. K

Dust and pollen filter*

The dust and pollen filter for the heating and ventilation system can be found under the cover on the right in the plenum chamber. The filter should be changed in accordance with the details given in the Service Schedules. If the air throughput reduces considerably, the filter should be changed earlier:

The filters should be changed by a Technical Service Centre. K

201If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

If and when

First aid kit, warning triangle

Vehicles without removable ball coupling on towing bracket

The standard first aid kit fits together with a warning triangle of the type shown here, in the mounting on left of luggage compartment. They are secured with the rubber band, which is hung behind a retainer (arrow). K

Vehicles with removable ball coupling* on towing bracket

The standard first aid kit fits together with a warning triangle of the type shown here, in the mounting on left of luggage compartment. They are secured with the rubber band, which is hung behind a retainer (arrow).

Note

The first aid kit and warning triangle are not included in the scope of delivery for the vehicle!

The first aid kit and warning triangle must correspond to legal stipulations.

You should also note the use-by date of the contents of the first aid kit. K

AL0-148

AL0-149

Fig. 165

Fig. 166

202 If and when

Vehicle tools, towing bracket*, spare wheel

Stowage of vehicle tools

The vehicle tools and the jack are located behind the right-hand luggage compartment trim and is accessible by opening a flap. The tool box is secured with a thumb wheel. K

Vehicle tools

AL0-130 Fig. 167 Fig. 168

Ensure that the vehicle tools are stowed securely, so that they cannot injure the vehicle occupants should you brake suddenly or be involved in an accident.

WARNING

AL0-150

The jack supplied by the factory is only designed for your vehicle model. On no account should heavier vehicles or other loads be lifted!

With the vehicle lifted never start the engine danger of accident.

If work has to be done underneath the vehicle, ensure that it is supported on suitable stands.

WARNING

203If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Vehicles may also have:

Tool box*

Wheel bolt spanner

Wire hook* for wheel trims

Open jaw spanner 10 x 13

Screwdriver with box spanner in handle for the wheel bolts. The screwdriver blade is reversible.

Jack

Before the jack is placed back into the tool box, the claw must be fully wound back. The crank is then tensioned against the side of the jack.

Some light alloy wheels have the caps on the wheel screws. A special wire hook is provided with the tool box to remove them.

Place the hook in the orifice on the cap and pull to remove fig. 168. K

Stowage of tow bracket*

Fig. 169

Fig. 170

AL0-131

AL0-132

204 If and when

On vehicles with a removable ball coupling on the tow bracket*, the ball coupling is stored behind the right side trim in the luggage compartment and is accessible after opening a flap. The ball coupling is secured with a thumb wheel.

An instruction manual for the installation or removal of the ball coupling can be found in a plastic bag in the vehicle tool box.

If the ball coupling has been installed, the bumper cover and the plug from the mounting can be placed in the plastic bag and stored in the vehicle as shown in the illustration fig. 170. K

Stowage of spare wheel

The spare wheel is located outside the vehicle, in a bracket below the luggage compartment floor. K

Removing spare wheel

Fold the small cover A in the luggage compartment floor near tailgate lock in the luggage compartment floor forwards fig. 171.

Ensure that the tow bracket* is stowed securely, so that they cannot injure the vehicle occupants should you brake suddenly or be involved in an accident.

WARNING

A

B

D

C

AL0-133 Fig. 171

Fig. 172

11

2

AL0-134

205If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Remove the rubber seal fig. 171 B on the eyelet upwards.

Take the wheel spanner fig. 171 C from the vehicle tools. Place it as far as it will go over the bolt. Hold in this position and press the locking ring fig. 171 D down.

Turn the box spanner C to the left until it is supporting the spare wheel, which is suspended from a steel cable fig. 171.

Squeeze the retainer lightly (arrows 1 ) and at the same time fold the cross piece in the direction shown 2 fig. 172. Now guide the retainer through the central opening in the spare wheel. K

Installing spare wheel

Stand the wheel behind the vehicle, as shown in the fig. 173.

Guide the retainer from the inner side of the wheel through the spare wheel central opening.

Fold the cross piece in the opposite to arrow fig. 172 2 .

Push the spare wheel under the vehicle with the outer side facing down.

Turn the bolt in the luggage compartment floor clockwise with the wheel spanner to lift the wheel into the spare wheel bracket under the vehicle. Ensure that the spare wheel fits into the recess (arrows) in the bumper fig. 173.

Turn the bolt (max. torque 25 Nm) until the spare wheel sits firmly in the luggage compartment floor. Seal the opening with the rubber seal and fold the cover back.

Note

If you need to drive without a spare wheel, the spare wheel bracket, together with the rope, must be fully wound up to the vehicle floor. K

Wheels

General notes

New tyres do not give maximum grip straight away and should therefore be run in at moderate speeds and a careful style of driving for about the first 100 km. This will help to make the tyres last longer.

Fig. 173AL0-135

206 If and when

The tread depth of new tyres can vary due to construction and design features, and depending on version and manufactures.

Check tyres for damage from time to time (cuts, splits, cracks and lumps) and remove any foreign bodies embedded in the treads.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels drive over curbs and similar obstacles very slowly and as nearly at right angles as possible.

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

Replace missing dust caps as soon as possible.

Mark wheels before taking them off so that they rotate in the same direction when put back on again.

When taken off, the tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.

Tyres which are not on wheels should be stored in a vertical position.

Note for tyres where the direction of rotation is stipulated

It is imperative that the designated direction of rotation for tyre treads (which can be determined from the arrow on the side of the tyre) be kept to. The best tyre performance i.e. in aquaplaning, road adhesion, noise and wear is then guaranteed. K

Tyre life

Tyre life depends to a considerable extent on the following factors:

Inflation pressure

The inflation pressures are to be found inside the fuel lid.

Damage to wheels and tyres is not always easy to see. Unusual vibrations or a pulling to one side could indicate tyre damage. If you suspect damage to a tyre, immediately reduce your speed. Visually check all tyres for damage (bulges, tears etc.). If no external damage can be seen, drive carefully to the nearest Technical Service Centre and have the vehicle checked over.

WARNING

B1H-085 Fig. 174

207If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

The inflation pressure is very important particularly at high speeds. Therefore, the pressures should be checked at least once a month and before every long journey.

At this opportunity do not forget the spare wheel:

The spare wheel with normal tyre should always be inflated to the highest pressure required on the vehicle.

Always check the pressures when the tyres are cold. When warm, the pressure is higher but do not reduce. If the load changes a great deal the pressure must be altered to suit.

On vehicles with wheel hub caps, valve extensions are fitted. It is not necessary to remove the valve extension piece in order to test and correct the inflation pressure.

Pressures which are too high or too low shorten tyre life quite apart from the detrimental influence on vehicle handling.

For the sake of the environment

A pressure which is too low increases the fuel consumption and this burdens the environment unnecessarily.

Mode of driving

Fast cornering, hard acceleration and violent braking also increase tyre wear.

Balancing wheels

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However when the vehicle is running various influences can cause the wheels to become unbalanced and this causes steering vibration.

As imbalance also increases steering, suspension and tyre wear the wheels should be balanced again. Furthermore a wheel should always be rebalanced when the tyre has been repaired or when a new tyre has been fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect wheel alignment not only causes excessive, usually uneven, tyre wear but can also impair the vehicles safe handling. In case of abnormal tyre wear, contact a Technical Service Centre.

Wear indicators

At the bottom of the tread of the original tyres there are 1.6 mm high wear indicators running across the tread fig. 174. There are 6-8 of these indicators according to make evenly spaced around the tyre circumference. Marks on the walls of the tyre (for example the letters TWI or triangles) show the locations of the wear indicators.

At continuous high speeds a tyre in which the pressure is too low flexes more and heats up excessively. This can cause tread separation and tyre blow out.

WARNING

208 If and when

Note

When tread depth is down to 1.6 mm measured in the tread groove next to the wear indicator bar the official permissible minimum tread depth has been reached (in export countries this figure may differ). K

Renewing wheels/tyres

Wheels and tyres are important design features. The wheels and tyres approved by us should be used. They are specially matched to the model concerned and contribute largely to the excellent roadholding and safe driving characteristics.

The Technical Services hold up to date information regarding the standard tyres fitted by the manufacturer. Also: Many Technical Services possess a large range of tyres and rims.

Fitting and repairing tyres requires expert knowledge and special tools. This work may only be carried out by specialist personnel.

For the sake of the environment

Because of the problems in disposing of old tyres and the specialised tools and knowledge required, tyres should preferably be changed at a Technical Service Centre.

For safety reasons the tyres should be renewed in pairs and not singly. The tyres with the deepest tread should always be on the front wheels.

You should only combine radial tyres of the same construction, size (rolling circumference) and, as far as possible, the same tread profile on all four wheels.

On four wheel drive vehicles all tyres must be of the same brand. Otherwise, the viscosity would unnecessarily increase the proportion of the rear drive since the axes would be turning at different speeds and this could cause damage.

If the spare wheel has got a different use than the wheels the car is using actually (for example, winter tyres or wide tyres), in case of a breakdown it will only be possible to be used for a short time and driving with special care. It will have to be replaced by the normal wheel as soon as possible.

Never fit used tyres whose previous history is not known.

Knowing the tyre lettering and its meaning makes the selection of the correct tyres easier. Radial ply tyres have the following lettering on the sidewall:

The tyres must be renewed when they are worn down to the wear indicators.

Worn tyres are detrimental to roadholding particularly at high speeds on wet roads. Furthermore, the vehicle tends to aquaplane sooner.

WARNING

209If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

The manufacturing date is also to be seen on the tyre wall (possibly only on inner side of wheel):

DOT ... 185 means that the tyre was manufactured the 18th week of 2005.

If you wish to fit your car with non-standard wheels or tyres please note:

Technical Service Centres have all the necessary information about the possible conversion of wheels, tyres and wheel trims. K

Wheel bolts

The wheel bolts must be clean and easy to turn do not grease or oil under any circumstances!

This applies not only to changing a defective wheel but also when replacing summer tyres with winter tyres and vice-versa. K

e.g. 195 / 65 R 15 91 T

195 = Tyre width in mm

65 = Height/width ratio in %

R = Radial construction code letter = Radial

15 = Wheel diameter in inches

91 = Carrying capability code

T = Speed code letter

Tyres which are more than 6 years old should only be used in an emergency and then with a particularly careful style of driving.

WARNING

For technical reasons it is not normally possible to use wheels from other vehicles in certain circumstances not even wheels from the same vehicle model!

WARNING

Using types of wheel and/or tyres which have not been approved by us for your vehicle model can be detrimental to the safety of the vehicle. It can also affect the vehicle under the Construction and Use regulations.

Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other.

Therefore, whenever wheels are changed to a different version (e.g. alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres), the corresponding wheel bolts with the corresponding length and taper, must also be used. The security of the wheels and the functioning of the brake system depend on this!

If wheel trim discs are subsequently installed it is essential to ensure that the air flow remains adequate to cool the brakes.

WARNING (continued)

210 If and when

Changing the wheels round

If the front tyres are worn more than the rear it is advisable to change the wheels round as shown. All tyres will then have approximately the same length of service life.

With certain types of tread wear it can be an advantage to change the wheels diagonally. For more details, contact a Technical Service Centre. K

Winter tyres

When fitting winter tyres note the following:

For better driving performance, fit winter tyres on all four wheels.

Winter tyres are no longer fully effective when the tread has worn down to a depth of 4 mm.

The following speed limits are valid for winter tyres:

Code letter Q max. 160 km/h

Code letter T max. 190 km/h

Code letter H max. 210 km/h

AL0-136 Fig. 175

In winter conditions, winter tyres will significantly improve handling of the vehicle. This also applies to versions with four wheel drive*.

Because of their make up (width, rubber mixture, tread formation etc.), summer tyres provide less traction on ice and snow.

WARNING

The highest permissible speed for your winter tyres must not be exceeded. This could damage the wheel and lead to a serious accident.

WARNING

211If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

For this reason, in some countries, vehicles which can exceed this speed must have an appropriate sticker in the drivers field of view. These are available from Technical Service Centres.

Please note regulations to this effect in your country.

All-weather tyres can also be used instead of winter tyres.

If you have a flat tyre the remarks on using the spare wheel on page 208 should be noted.

Do not leave winter tyres fitted for an unnecessary long period because when the roads are free of snow and ice the handling with summer tyres is better.

For the sake of the environment

For environmental reasons summer tyres should be fitted again as soon as possible because normally they are quieter in running, tyre wear is reduced and the fuel consumption is lower. K

Snow chains

Snow chains may only be fitted on the front wheels. This also applies to vehicles with four wheel drive*.

The use of snow chains on the tyres 195/65 R 15 is allowed.

Only use thin chains which do not stand clear more than 15 mm (including tensioner).

When using snow chains wheel rim plates and rim rings must be taken off. In this case, to protect the wheel, the bolts must then be fitted with caps which are available from Technical Service Centres.

When driving over roads which are free of snow you must remove the chains. On such roads they are detrimental to vehicle handling, damage the tyres and wear out quickly.

In some countries the maximum permissible speed with snow chains is 50 km/h. K

Changing wheels

Preparation work

In case of a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far as possible away from the traffic flow. If necessary, switch hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position note any statutory requirements.

All vehicle occupants should leave the vehicle and move to a safe area (e.g. behind safety barrier).

Pull handbrake firmly, engage a gear or engage selector lever in the "P" position and chock opposite wheel with a stone or similar.

In case you tow a trailer unhook trailer from tractor vehicle before changing the wheels.

WARNING

212 If and when

Caution

Carry out wheel change on as flat a surface as possible.

Take the tools out of the vehicle.

Take spare wheel out of bracket.

To remove wheel trim:

Remove wheel bolt caps.

Remove hub cap or wheel trim with the wheel spanner and the wire hook. K

Wheel trims

Push the wheel spanner as far as possible onto the wheel bolt fig. 176 and turn the spanner anti-clockwise. When doing this, grip the spanner as far as possible towards the lever end.

If the bolts cannot be loosened, one can in an emergency, carefully push the spanner down with a foot on the end of the lever. One should ensure that one has a firm stance and a good grip on the vehicle.

Loosen wheel bolts about one turn.

Refer to page 214 for notes on loosening the anti-theft wheel bolts*. K

Raising the vehicle

B45-082C Fig. 176

Fig. 177AL0-0137

213If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Depressions under vehicle for jack:

Depressions in the side member at front and rear indicate the points at which the claw of jack must be fitted to the vertical rib of the side member arrows, fig. 177.

Wind jack arm up by turning the crank in the spindle until the jack just goes under the vehicle.

The claw of the jack must fit round the vertical rib on the side member so that the jack cannot slip when vehicle is lifted fig. 178.

If the ground is soft, place a large strong piece of packing under the jack base plate.

Align jack and at same time wind claw up further until it contacts the vehicle.

Lift vehicle until the wheel is just clear of the ground. K

Removing and fitting the wheel

Remove the wheel bolts, place them on a clean surface (hub cap, cloth) next to the jack and take the wheel off.

Fit spare wheel and lightly tighten all bolts. The wheel bolts must be clean and easy to turn do not under any circumstances use grease or oil!

Lower vehicle and fully tighten bolts in diagonal sequence.

Refit the wheel trim.

Place and secure the defective wheel in the spare wheel bracket "Spare wheel" chapter.

Note

The following points should be noted after changing a wheel:

Check the inflation pressure of the replacement wheel as soon as possible.

Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench as quickly as possible. The torque for steel and alloy wheels is 170 Nm.

If the wheel bolts are seen to be corroded or too tight when changing the wheel, they must be replaced before checking the torque.

Until this has been done, you should only drive at low speeds.

Fig. 178AL0-138

If the jack is not fitted at the points marked or described, damage could be caused to the vehicle. There is also a risk of injury!

WARNING

214 If and when

The defective wheel should be repaired as soon as possible.

Notes for tyres where the direction of rotation is stipulated

It is imperative that the designated direction of rotation for the tyre treads (which can be determined from the arrow on the side of the tyre) be kept to. The best tyre performance i.e. in aquaplaning, road adhesion, noise and wear are then guaranteed.

If a spare wheel has to be fitted against the stipulated direction of rotation, this measure should only be a temporary one. The best possible tyre performance concerning aquaplaning, noise level and wear are no longer fully guaranteed.

We recommend that you take this into account, especially in wet weather, and adjust your speed to the driving conditions.

In order to use the principle of the direction of rotation fully again, the faulty tyre must be replaced as soon as possible.

If necessary, mount the tyre fitted against the direction of rotation in the stipulated direction. K

Anti-theft wheel bolts*

If the vehicle is to be subsequently fitted with wheels or tyres which differ from those fitted by the factory, it is essential to read the remarks on page 208. K

WARNING

2

1

AL0-053

B7M-0001

Fig. 179

Fig. 180

215If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

The Alhambras alloy wheels have anti-theft wheel bolts. The special adapter required for these bolts is contained in the vehicle tool kit.

The procedure for changing a wheel is as follows:

First press the adapter 2 as far as possible into the star shaped depression on the anti-theft wheel bolt 1 fig. 179.

Push the wheel spanner (from the vehicle tools) as far as possible onto the adapter 2 and loosen/tighten the wheel bolt as necessary "Replacing a wheel" chapter.

Note

We recommend always carrying the adaptor in the space provided for it in the tool box fig. 180

Should you lose the adapter fig. 179 2 , SEAT Service can supply you with a new one with reference to the code card (also in vehicle tools).

You should keep the code card in a safe place on no account should it be left in the vehicle. A replacement adapter can only be supplied using this code card. K

Fuses

The individual current circuits are protected by fuses.

All electric windows are protected together via an automatic fuse which breaks the circuit when overloaded (e.g. windows frozen) and completes the circuit again after a few seconds.

It is advisable to always carry a few spare fuses on the vehicle.

Fuse colour code

K

Never, under any circumstances repair the fuses or replace them with more powerful ones, as damage in another part of the electrical system could occur. This could even lead to a fire. K

WARNING

Colour Amperes

Purple 3

Beige 5

Brown 7,5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White 25

Green 30

216 If and when

Changing a fuse

Please note the warnings from the "Engine compartment" chapter and following ones, before undergoing any work on the engine or engine compartment.

The fuses are located behind a cover in the instrument panel fig. 45 and fig. 181.

In some models, there are additional fuses in the engine compartment, for example on top of the battery.

Switch off ignition and the component concerned.

Take cover off fig. 181

In the cover or in the fuse box you will find plastic pliers* to remove the fuses.

You will find the fuse layout on a label in the fuse box cover.

Remove the appropriate fuse.

Replace blown fuse can be recognised by the burnt metal strip with a fuse of same amperage.

Replace the cover.

If the newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical system must be checked by a Technical Service Centre as soon as possible. K

Fuse layout

You will find the fuse layout on a label in the fuse box cover.

The meaning of the symbols on the label are explained as follows:

AL0-139 Fig. 181 Symbol Meaning

Dipped beam

Main beam

Adjustment of headlight range

Parking light

Foglight

Rear foglight

Reverse light

Indicators

Hazard warning lights

Instrument panel lighting

217If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

K

Symbol Meaning

Fan

Air conditioning

Heating

Heated windshield

Heated rear window

Heated rearview mirrors

Adjustment of outside mirrors

Lowering of outside mirrors

Seat heating

Horn

Windscreen washer/wiper

Rear windscreen washer/wiper

Rear windscreen washer

Headlight washer

Sliding roof

Electric windows

Lighter

Electric side windows

Central locking/Remote control

Electric switchboard

Ignition

Symbol Meaning

Diagnosis

ABS

ESP

Selector lever positions (in display)

Electronic immobilizer

License plate lighting

Heated ejectors

Instrument panel

Central locking

Radio

CD changer/player

Telephone/telematic function*

Mobile telephone

Cruise control

Radio navigation system

Interior lighting

Reading light

Fuel pump

Trailer light connection

Parking assistance

218 If and when

Changing bulbs

General notes

In most cases it is no longer possible to change a bulb without having to remove other vehicle parts. This is particularly the case for bulbs which can only be accessed through the engine compartment. Special skills are needed for this.

For this reason, the bulbs should always be changed by Technical Service Centre or qualified personnel. K

Side turn signals

You must take great care when doing work on the engine compartment.

H7 bulbs* are pressured and may explode while being changed. Danger of injury.

Inappropriate handling of the high tension part of a gas discharge bulb* may put you at risk of death.

WARNING

1

2 AL0-140

AL0-141

Fig. 182

Fig. 183

219If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Press turn signal to front fig. 182 arrow 1 and remove fig. 182 arrow 2 .

Remove the bulb carrier and disconnect it.

Pull out defective glass based bulb and insert new bulb.

Insert the bulb carrier into the indicator covers.

First place turn signal with retaining lugs fig. 184 arrow 1 in body opening and then engage light in direction of arrow fig. 182 2 . K

Rear lights

Before changing rear light bulbs the boot lid must be opened.

The bulbs are arranged as follows.

In the body

Turn signal, tail light and brake/tail light.

In tailgate or boot lid

Reversing light and rear fog light. K

Lights in the body

Open flap in the luggage compartment trim.

Press sidepiece in the direction of the arrow.

1

2 AL0-142 Fig. 184

Fig. 185AL0-066

220 If and when

Press defective bulb into holder, turn it to left and take it out.

Insert new bulb and turn it fully to the right.

Place lamp holder by pressing until it engages. The sidepiece will make a "clicking" noise. K

Lights in the tailgate

Remove flap in trim.

Press spring retainer in direction of arrow and remove downwards.

Press defective bulb into holder, turn it to left and take it out.

Insert new bulb and turn it fully to the right.

Fix the bulb carrier into the corresponding opening (arrow 1 ) by the front tab and push the bulb carrier upwards from beneath (arrow 2 ) until the sprung tab engages.

Refit flap. To do this, first slide both flap lugs behind tailgate trim and press flap upwards until it engages. K

1

2 AL0-151

AL0-055 Fig. 186

Fig. 187

221If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Number plate light

Unscrew lens.

Pull defective glass based bulb out of bulb holder and insert new bulb.

Do not overtighten lens. Ensure that the seals are properly located.

Insert lens in the tailgate opening, ensure that the rubber seal and the light are correctly positioned (see adjacent light).

Do not overtighten the lens screws. K

Interior light

Insert a knife or similar in the gap between housing and lens (arrow) and carefully lever lens off.

Exchange bulb.

Press lens back into housing. K

Fig. 188 Fig. 189B7M-0018 AL0-062

222 If and when

Reading light Remove complete light carrier (inner and reading light), to do this insert the flat blade of screwdriver (it is in the long end of the wheel spanner Vehicle tools, page 202) between light and headlining and turn screwdriver.

Turn bulb holder on back of light in direction of arrow and remove fig. 191.

Pull defective glass based bulb out of holder.

Insert new bulb.

Insert holder in housing again and turn fully to right.

First insert left side of light carrier and then press into the opening in headlining. K

Installing a radio

When retro-fitting a radio, but also when replacing a set installed by the factory the following points should be noted:

The connection* in the vehicle is for Genuine SEAT radios1).

Radios with other connections must be connected with an adapter cable which can also be obtained from Technical Service Centres.

AL0-145

B7M-0019 Fig. 190

Fig. 191

1) Not available in all countries

223If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Caution

Apart from this, important electronic components can be damaged or the functioning impaired. If for example the speed signal is disturbed this can lead to faulty management of engine, automatic gearbox, ABS etc.

Even connecting the speed signal to radio sets with speed dependent volume control from other manufacturers can cause such faults.

Therefore, it is recommended that the Technical Service install the radio. They are fully informed about the technical features of the vehicle, have the Genuine radios1), the necessary fitting parts from the Genuine SEAT Accessory Programme1) and work in accordance with the guidelines developed by the factory.

The radios from the Genuine SEAT Accessory Programme1) are similar to those used in the factory and ensure trouble-free installation. These sets are in keeping with the advanced technology and well-planned easy-to-operate design. In Germany there is also an Exchange Service for these radios so that even after years of use a set requiring repair can be exchanged cheaply for a completely reconditioned, good-as-new set by a SEAT dealer.

Loudspeakers, fitting parts, aerials and suppression kits should also be taken from the Genuine SEAT Accessory Programme1). These parts have all been specially developed for each vehicle model. K

Mobile telephones and radio telephones

Mobile phones and radio telephones should be installed by a specialised workshop.

SEAT has authorised the use of mobile telephones and two-way radios for your vehicle with correctly installed external aerial and maximum broadcast power of 10 Watts.

Caution

When using mobile telephones or two-way, faults in the vehicle electrics could occur under the following conditions:

no external aerial

external aerial incorrectly installed

broadcast power higher than 10 Watts.

Mobile telephones or two-way radios must not, therefore, be operated inside the vehicle without a separate external aerial or with an aerial which has been incorrectly installed.

Furthermore, optimal range is only achieved with an external aerial.

1) Not available in all countries

On no account cut wires off and leave them without insulation. If necessary use a proper adapter.

Otherwise the wiring can be overloaded or short circuits can occur danger of fire!

WARNING

Mobile telephones and two-way radios operated inside the vehicle without a separate external aerial or with an incorrectly installed external aerial can be harmful to health due to the extremely high electromagnetic fields generated.

WARNING

224 If and when

Note

Please take the time to review the instruction manuals provided with mobile telephones and two-way radios!

If you wish to use mobile phones or radio telephones with a transmission power of over 10 W, you must necessarily check with your Technical Service Centre. They will inform you about the technical possibilities for additional mobile and radio phone equipment.

Emergency starting

Jump leads

If the engine will not start because the battery is flat, jump leads can be connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine. The following points should be noted:

Both batteries must be of the 12 Volt variety and the capacity (Ah) of the booster battery must be approximately the same as that of the flat battery.

The jumper cables must be heavy enough to carry the load. Note cable manufacturers data.

Only use jumper cables with insulated clips.

There must be no contact between the vehicles, otherwise current can flow as soon as the plus terminals are connected.

The flat battery must be properly connected to the electrical system.

The engine of the boosting vehicle must be running.

Ensure that the insulated clips have enough contact to metal. This is particularly applicable to clips which are attached to the engine block.

Colors of jumper cables:

Positive cable: generally red.

Negative cable: generally black, brown or blue. K

Please concentrate on your driving first of all. Never install telephone retainers on the Air Bag cover or within its range of effectiveness. This would increase the risk of injury should the Air Bag be activated during an accident. K

WARNING

A flat battery can freeze at temperatures of less than 0C. A flat battery must first be thawed out before attaching the jump leads, as it could otherwise explode.

WARNING

225If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

How to jump start

A Flat battery

B Boosting battery

The battery is in the engine compartment on the left looking forward.

The emergency starting cable must be attached in the following order:

Before the starting cable can be connected to the (+) terminal on the battery of the vehicle, the cover of the fuse holder must first be opened page 216.

1. One end of (+) cable (usually red) to the (+) terminal of the flat battery A .

2. Other end of the red cable to the (+) terminal of boosting battery B .

3. One end of () cable (usually black) to the () terminal of boosting battery B .

4. Other end of black cable X to a solid metal part bolted to the block or to cylinder block itself.

Do not connect the cable to the flat battery minus terminal. The sparks could ignite the explosive gas flowing out of the battery.

Start the engine as described in the Starting engine section.

If the engine does not start at once, stop using starter after 10 seconds, wait about half a minute and then try again.

With engine running, disconnect cables in reverse sequence to the connection. K

A

B

X

1.

2. 3.

4.

B1H-236C Fig. 192

The non-insulated parts of the cable clips must not touch one another on any account. Furthermore the jumper cable attached to the battery positive terminal must not come into contact with electrically conductive vehicle parts danger of short circuit!

Route the jumper cables so that they cannot come into contact with rotating parts in the engine compartment.

Do not stand with your face over the battery danger of acid burns!

Keep sources of ignition (naked flames, burning cigarettes etc.) well away from the battery danger of explosion!

WARNING

226 If and when

Tow starting/towing

A tow-rope or a towing bar must only be applied at the following points:

Front towing eye

The front towing eye is located on the right below the bumper. It is protected by a flap. To remove the flap, pull it forward and allow it to hang.

Rear towing eye

The rear towing eye is also located on the right under the bumper. It is not covered. K

General notes

Check whether there are any local traffic regulations concerning the towing of vehicles.

The tow-rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the risk of damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to use synthetic fibre ropes, or ropes of similar elastic material. It is however safer to use a towing bar!

Avoid excessive towing effort and do not jerk. During towing operations on other than surfaced roads there is always the danger that the attachment points will be overloaded and damaged.

Before trying to tow start, an attempt should be made to start using the battery of another vehicle page 225.

Both drivers must be familiar with towing procedures. Inexperienced drivers should not attempt to tow start or tow.

When using a tow-rope the driver of the towing vehicle must engage the clutch very gently when moving off and changing gear.

The driver of the vehicle being towed must ensure that the tow- rope is always taut.

The emergency lights must be switched on in both vehicles unless local regulations differ.

Turn ignition on so that the steering wheel is free and the turn signals, horn, and, if necessary, the windscreen wiper and washer can be used.

As the brake servo only works when the engine is running, considerably more pressure is required on the brake pedal when the engine is not running.

More force than usual will be required to turn the steering wheel as the power assisted steering does not work when engine is not running.

When there is no lubricant in the manual or automatic gearbox, the vehicle may only be towed with driving wheels lifted. K

227If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Tow starting

Caution

It is not recommended to tow start a vehicle. We recommend the use of another vehicles battery. Check the "Start up help" chapter.

There are various reasons why a vehicle should not be tow started:

When towing there is a danger of colliding with the towed vehicle.

In vehicles with a petrol engine, fuel may accumulate in the catalysts and cause damage.

The following points must be noted by the driver of the manual gear vehicle being tow started1):

Before moving off, engage 2nd or 3rd gear, depress and hold clutch.

Switch ignition on.

Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.

As soon as engine starts, depress clutch and move gear lever into neutral to avoid running into the towing vehicle.

For technical reasons tow starting a vehicle with an automatic gear box is not possible. K

Towing

When towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the following points must be noted in addition to the details on the previous page:

Selector lever at N.

Do not have the vehicle towed faster than 30 mph (50 km/h).

Do not tow further than 30 miles (50 kilometres).

If the vehicle has to be towed long distances it must be lifted at the front.

Reason: When the engine is not running, the gearbox oil pump is not working and the gearbox is not adequately lubricated for high speeds or long distances.

With a breakdown vehicle the vehicle may only be suspended at the front.

Reason: If given a rear suspended tow, the drive shafts turn backwards. The planetary gears in the automatic gearbox then turn at such high speeds that the gearbox will be severely damaged in a short time. K

1) Valid as an exceptional measure for vehicles with Diesel engines.

228 If and when

Lifting the vehicle

Trolley jack

To prevent damage to the underside of the vehicle it is essential to use a suitable rubber pad.

Caution

On no account should the vehicle be lifted under the engine, gearbox, rear axle or front axle as this can cause serious damage.

Vehicle hoist

Before driving over the vehicle lift, ensure that there is adequate clearance between lift superstructure and low parts on underside of vehicle.

Hoists with fluid cushions (repair reception hoists) must not be used to lift this vehicle. K

Lifting points for workshop hoist and trolley jack

AL0-146

AL0-147

With the vehicle lifted never start the engine danger of accident!

If work has to be done underneath the vehicle, the vehicle must be supported on suitable stands. K

WARNING

Fig. 193

Fig. 194

229If and when

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

The vehicle may only be lifted at the points shown here. The illustrations show the lifting points on the left hand side of the vehicle.

Front

At the front side member fig. 193.

Rear

On the vertical side member reinforcement in the area of the marking for the vehicle jack fig. 194.

Vehicle jack

Lifting the vehicle with the onboard jack is described in the "Changing wheels" chapter. K

231

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

General notes

Technical data

General notes

General considerations on technical data

Important

Unless otherwise indicated, all technical details provided below apply to vehicles with standard fittings.

These values may be different for special vehicles or vehicles destined for other countries.

Please bear in mind that the data in the cars official documents takes precedence. K

Engine data

The engine fitted in your vehicle is indicated in the data sheet included in the Inspection and Maintenance Plan and in the cars official documents. K

Performance

These values were calculated without extra equipment reducing performance, such as air conditioning, mud flaps, extra wide tyres, etc. K

Fuel Consumption

The consumption and emission levels were calculated using the 93/116/CE measuring standards and take into account the true free-standing weight of the vehicle (weight category). To measure the fuel consumption the vehicle is tested in two different cycles on a rolling bench under the following conditions:

Town driving is measured from a cold start of the engine. Then, driving conditions similar to those of in-town driving are simulated.

Intercity driving the car is accelerated and braked in all gears, just as in normal driving. The driving speed varies between 0 and 120 km/h.

Total consumption is based on a balanced average of 37% of town driving and 63% of intercity driving.

CO2 emission levels are obtained from the exhaust fumes of the vehicles tested in town and intercity driving on a rolling belt. These fumes are then analysed and the CO2 emission levels are obtained, among other values.

Note

The consumption and emission levels given in the following tables are correct for unloaded vehicles with basic fittings. If there are extra fittings, the empty weight will increase and, as a result, the weight category, which may slightly increase the consumption and CO2 levels. Consult a Technical Service Centre to find out the exact specifications of your vehicle.

Driving style, road and traffic conditions, weather conditions and the condition of the vehicle will, in practice, produce consumption levels different to those indicated. K

232 General notes

Weights

Note

These weights are valid for European Union vehicles. Vehicles for other countries may have other weights. At all times it should be taken into account that the data given with the official vehicle document prevails.

Tyre pressure

The pressure values given here are for cold tyres do not reduce the high pressure of warm tyres.

Tow loads

Support loads

The maximum authorised load on the ball bar of the ball joint of the towing system is 50 kg.

The minimum support load must be 4% of the real tow load. However it need not be more than 25 kg. You should use the full authorised load available to you.

Note

These weights are valid for European Union vehicles. Vehicles for other countries may take other weights. At all times it should be taken into account that the data given with the official vehicle documents prevails.

For safety reasons, do not drive above 80 km/h, not even in those countries where travelling at a greater speed is permitted.

Due to special versions of certain models and optional extras such as air conditioning, sliding/tilting roof, tow bar and other added features, the free standing weight increases, meaning that the load size is correspondingly re- duced.

The maximum authorized load and the load on the axle must never be exceeded. See the tables on the following pages.

It must be remembered that when transporting heavy objects, the centre of gravity is displaced. For this reason, speed and driving should be adjusted accordingly.

When loading luggage always ensure that no loose objects will fly towards the front of the vehicle in the event of sharp braking. If necessary use the lashing rings* provided. K

WARNING

Tyre pressure is of great importance, particularly at high speeds, and should be checked at least once a month. K

WARNING

It must be remembered that when transporting heavy objects, the centre of gravity is displaced. For this reason, speed and driving should be adjusted accordingly.

When loading luggage always ensure that no loose objects will fly towards the front of the vehicle in the event of sharp braking. If necessary use the lashing rings* provided. K

WARNING

233Weights and measurements

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Weights and measurements

Fixing points for tow bar*

A 6 mounting points

B at least 65 mm

All dimensions in mm.

Note

Technical Service Centres are equipped with the accurate information for the retrofitting of towing devices and the requirements for reinforcing the cooling system. For these reasons, it is best to have the fitting done by a Technical Service Centre. K

Danger of accident!

We recommend that you visit a Technical Service Centre for the retrofitting of a tow hook.

WARNING

A

A

B 980

A AL0-125 Fig. 195

234 Vehicle identification data

Vehicle identification data

Vehicle identification data

1 Type plate.

2 Vehicle identification number.

3 Engine number. K

Vehicle data sticker

The sticker is stuck on the inside rim of the spare wheel or on the floor of the boot.

It carries the following information:

1 Production control bar code.

2 Vehicle identification number.

3 Vehicle model number.

4 Model/engine power.

5 Engine and gear change acronyms.

6 Paint code/inside finish numbers.

7 Optional extras code numbers.

The vehicle data from numbers 2 to 7 are also included in the maintenance and inspection plan. K

B1H-116C

Fig. 196

Fig. 197

2

3

3

1

AL0-154

235Vehicle identification data

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Data-carrying adhesive

A Brand

B Countersign for the official approval number

C Chassis number

D M.A.W.1)

E M.A.W.1) of vehicle (loaded vehicle)

F M.A.W.1) on front axle

G M.A.W.1) on rear axle

H Type

I Emissions coefficient K

VSSZZZ 1MZWB000 149

SEAT S.A.

kg kg kg kg

1- 2- Typ

01 11

00 45

65 09

6

A

B C

D E F G

H I

TO0-003

1) Maximum Authorized Weight

Fig. 198

236 Engine data

Engine data

2.0 85 kW Petrol engine. 6 gears

Output kW (HP) after 1/min 85 (115)/5200

Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 170/2600-4200

Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1984

Compression 10.5 0.5

Fuel Super 95 ROZa)/Normal 91b) ROZa)

Engine data

Maximum speed in km/h 177

Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 10.6

Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 15.2

Performance

a) Research-Oktan-Zahl = Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol. b) Slight power loss Please refer to the chapter Petrol.

Town driving 12.8/307 12.9/310 13.0/312 13.1/314

Intercity driving 7.4/178 7.5/180 7.6/182 7.7/185

Total 9.4/226 9.5/228 9.6/230 9.7/233

Fuel consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 (g/km)

237Engine data

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Maximum authorised weight in kg 2430c)

Weight in driving order (with driver) in kg 1653/1973

Authorised load on front axle in kg 1210

Authorised load on rear axle in kg 1280d)

Authorised load on roof in kg 75

Weights

Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 700

Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 1800

Tow weights

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.0 l.

Engine oil capacity

c) The weight of 85 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer. d) The weight of 75 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer.

K

238 Engine data

2.0 85 kW Petrol engine. Automatic gearbox

Output kW (HP) after 1/min 85 (115)/5200

Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 170/2600-4200

Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1984

Compression 10

Fuel Super 95 ROZa)/Normal 91b) ROZa)

Engine data

Maximum speed in km/h 173

Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 11.3

Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 17.2

Performance

a) Research-Oktan-Zahl = Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol. b) Slight power loss Please refer to the chapter Petrol.

Town driving 14.2/341 14.4/346 14.6/350 14.8/355

Intercity driving 8.1/194 8.3/199 8.5/204 8.7/209

Total 10.4/250 10.6/254 10.8/259 11.0/264

Fuel consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 (g/km)

239Engine data

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Maximum authorised weight in kg 2450c)

Weight in driving order (with driver) in kg 1673/1993

Authorised load on front axle in kg 1240

Authorised load on rear axle in kg 1280d)

Authorised load on roof in kg 75

Weights

Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 700

Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 1800

Tow weights

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.0 l.

Engine oil capacity

c) The weight of 85 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer. d) The weight of 75 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer.

K

240 Engine data

1.8 110 kW Petrol engine. 6 gears

Output kW (HP) after 1/min 110 (150)/5800

Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 210/1800-4300

Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1781

Compression 9.5 0.5

Fuel Super 95 ROZa)

Engine data

Maximum speed in km/h 199

Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 7.2

Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 10.9

Performance

a) Research-Oktan-Zahl = Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol.

Town driving 13.0/312 13.1/314 13.2/317 13.3/319

Intercity driving 7.3/175 7.4/178 7.5/180 7.6/182

Total 9.4/226 9.5/228 9.6/230 9.7/233

Fuel consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 (g/km)

241Engine data

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Maximum authorised weight in kg 2450b)

Weight in driving order (with driver) in kg 1674/1994

Authorised load on front axle in kg 1240

Authorised load on rear axle in kg 1280c)

Authorised load on roof in kg 75

Weights

Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 700

Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 1900

Tow weights

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 l.

Engine oil capacity

b) The weight of 85 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer. c) The weight of 75 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer.

K

242 Engine data

1.8 110 kW Petrol engine. Automatic gearbox

Output kW (HP) after 1/min 110 (150)/5500

Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 210/1850-4500

Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1780

Compression 9.5

Fuel Super 95 ROZa)

Engine data

Maximum speed in km/h 195

Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 8.3

Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 12.1

Performance

a) Research-Oktan-Zahl = Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol.

Town driving 14.1/338 14.3/343 14.5/348 14.7/353

Intercity driving 8.0/192 8.2/197 8.4/202 8.6/206

Total 10.2/245 10.4/250 10.6/254 10.8/259

Fuel consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 (g/km)

243Engine data

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Maximum authorised weight in kg 2480b)

Weight in driving order (with driver) in kg 1707/2005 1707/2027

Authorised load on front axle in kg 1240

Authorised load on rear axle in kg 1280c)

Authorised load on roof in kg 75

Weights

Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 700

Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 1900

Tow weights

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 l.

Engine oil capacity

b) The weight of 85 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer. c) The weight of 75 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer.

K

244 Engine data

2.8 VR6 150 kW Petrol engine. 6 gears

Output kW (HP) after 1/min 150 (204)/6200

Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 265/3400

Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 6/2792

Compression 10.75 0.25

Fuel Super 98 ROZa)/Super 95b) ROZa)

Engine data

Maximum speed in km/h 217

Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 7.2

Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 9.9

Performance

a) Research-Oktan-Zahl = Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol. b) Slight power loss Please refer to the chapter Petrol.

Town driving 14.5/348 14.6/350 14.7/353 14.8/355

Intercity driving 8.2/197 8.3/199 8.4/202 8.5/204

Total 10.5/252 10.6/254 10.7/257 10.8/259

Fuel consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 (g/km)

245Engine data

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Maximum authorised weight in kg 2470c)

Weight in driving order (with driver) in kg 1694/2014

Authorised load on front axle in kg 1240

Authorised load on rear axle in kg 1280d)

Authorised load on roof in kg 75

Weights

Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 700

Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 2000

Tow weights

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.5 l.

Engine oil capacity

c) The weight of 85 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer. d) The weight of 75 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer.

K

246 Engine data

2.8 VR6 150 kW Petrol engine. Automatic gearbox

Output kW (HP) after 1/min 150 (204)/6200

Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 265/3400

Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 6/2792

Compression 10.75 0.25

Fuel Super 98 ROZa)/Super 95b) ROZa)

Engine data

Maximum speed in km/h 217

Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 7.4

Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 10.4

Performance

a) Research-Oktan-Zahl = Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol. b) Slight power loss Please refer to the chapter Petrol.

Town driving 16.2/389 16.4/394 16.6/398 16.8/403

Intercity driving 8.6/206 8.8/211 9.0/216 9.2/221

Total 11.4/274 11.6/278 11.8/283 12.0/288

Fuel consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 (g/km)

247Engine data

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Maximum authorised weight in kg 2470c)

Weight in driving order (with driver) in kg 1727/2020 1727/2025

Authorised load on front axle in kg 1240

Authorised load on rear axle in kg 1280d)

Authorised load on roof in kg 75

Weights

Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 700

Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 2000

Tow weights

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.5 l.

Engine oil capacity

c) The weight of 85 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer. d) The weight of 75 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer.

K

248 Engine data

2.8 VR6 150 kW Petrol engine. 6 gears. Four-wheel drive

Output kW (HP) after 1/min 150 (204)/6200

Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 265/3400

Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 6/2792

Compression 10.75 0.25

Fuel Super 98 ROZa)/Super 95b) ROZa)

Engine data

Maximum speed in km/h 214

Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 7.4

Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 10.3

Performance

a) Research-Oktan-Zahl = Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol. b) Slight power loss Please refer to the chapter Petrol.

Town driving 14.9/358 15.1/362 15.3/367 15.5/372

Intercity driving 8.7/209 8.9/214 9.1/218 9.3/223

Total 11.0/264 11.2/269 11.4/274 11.6/278

Fuel consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 (g/km)

249Engine data

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Maximum authorised weight in kg 2500c)

Weight in driving order (with driver) in kg 1786/2047 1786/2084

Authorised load on front axle in kg 1240

Authorised load on rear axle in kg 1330d)

Authorised load on roof in kg 75

Weights

Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 700

Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 2000

Tow weights

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.5 l.

Engine oil capacity

c) The weight of 85 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer. d) The weight of 75 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer.

K

250 Engine data

1.9 66 kW TDI Diesel engine. 6 gears

Output kW (HP) after 1/min 66 (90)/4000

Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 240/1900

Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1896

Compression 18.0 0.5

Fuel Min 49 Cza) or Biodiesel

Engine data

Maximum speed in km/h 164

Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 10.9

Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 17.2

Performance

a) Cetan-Zahl (Cetane Index) = Measurement of fuel combustion power.

Town driving 8.0/216 8.1/219 8.2/221 8.3/224

Intercity driving 5.5/149 5.6/151 5.7/154 5.8/157

Total 6.4/173 6.5/176 6.6/178 6.7/181

Fuel consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 (g/km)

251Engine data

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Maximum authorised weight in kg 2510b)

Weight in driving order (with driver) in kg 1724/2003

Authorised load on front axle in kg 1240

Authorised load on rear axle in kg 1280c)

Authorised load on roof in kg 75

Weights

Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 700

Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 2000

Tow weights

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 l.

Engine oil capacity

b) The weight of 85 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer. c) The weight of 75 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer.

K

252 Engine data

1.9 85 kW TDI Diesel engine. 6 gears

Output kW (HP) after 1/min 85 (115)/4000

Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 310/1900

Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1896

Compression 18.0 0.5

Fuel Min 49 Cza) or Biodiesel

Engine data

Maximum speed in km/h 181

Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 9.1

Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 13.7

Performance

a) Cetan-Zahl (Cetane Index) = Measurement of fuel combustion power.

Town driving 8.3/224 8.4/227 8.5/230 8.6/232

Intercity driving 5.2/140 5.3/143 5.4/146 5.5/149

Total 6.3/170 6.4/173 6.5/176 6.6/178

Fuel consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 (g/km)

253Engine data

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Maximum authorised weight in kg 2510b)

Weight in driving order (with driver) in kg 1724/2003

Authorised load on front axle in kg 1240

Authorised load on rear axle in kg 1280c)

Authorised load on roof in kg 75

Weights

Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 700

Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 2000

Tow weights

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 l.

Engine oil capacity

b) The weight of 85 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer. c) The weight of 75 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer.

K

254 Engine data

1.9 85 kW TDI Diesel engine. Automatic gearbox

Output kW (HP) after 1/min 85 (115)/4000

Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 310/1900

Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1896

Compression 18.0 0.5

Fuel Min 49 Cza) or Biodiesel

Engine data

Maximum speed in km/h 177

Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 9.9

Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 15.1

Performance

a) Cetan-Zahl (Cetane Index) = Measurement of fuel combustion power.

Town driving 9.5/257 9.7/262 9.9/267

Intercity driving 6.1/165 6.3/170 6.5/176

Total 7.4/200 7.6/205 7.8/211

Fuel consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 (g/km)

255Engine data

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Maximum authorised weight in kg 2510b)

Weight in driving order (with driver) in kg 1757/2014 1757/2020

Authorised load on front axle in kg 1240

Authorised load on rear axle in kg 1280c)

Authorised load on roof in kg 75

Weights

Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 700

Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 2000

Tow weights

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 l.

Engine oil capacity

b) The weight of 85 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer. c) The weight of 75 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer.

K

256 Engine data

1.9 85 kW TDI Diesel engine. 6 gears. Four-wheel drive

Output kW (HP) after 1/min 85 (115)/4000

Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 310/1900

Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1896

Compression 18.0 0.5

Fuel Min 49 Cza) or Biodiesel

Engine data

Maximum speed in km/h 178

Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 9.3

Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 14.7

Performance

a) Cetan-Zahl (Cetane Index) = Measurement of fuel combustion power.

Town driving 9.7/262 9.1/246 9.3/251 9.5/257

Intercity driving 6.5/176 5.9/159 6.1/165 6.3/170

Total 7.7/208 7.1/192 7.3/197 7.5/203

Fuel consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 (g/km)

257Engine data

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Maximum authorised weight in kg 2510b)

Weight in driving order (with driver) in kg 1784/2040 1784/2082

Authorised load on front axle in kg 1240

Authorised load on rear axle in kg 1330c)

Authorised load on roof in kg 75

Weights

Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 700

Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 2000

Tow weights

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 l.

Engine oil capacity

b) The weight of 85 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer. c) The weight of 75 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer.

K

258 Engine data

1.9 96 kW TDI Diesel engine

Output kW (HP) after 1/min 96 (130)/4000

Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 310/1900

Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1896

Compression 19 0.5

Fuel Min 49 Cza) or Biodiesel

Engine data

Maximum speed in km/h 188

Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 8.6

Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 12.8

Performance

a) Cetan-Zahl (Cetane Index) = Measurement of fuel combustion power.

Town driving 8.0/216 8.1/219 8.2/221 8.3/224

Intercity driving 5.2/140 5.3/143 5.4/146 5.5/149

Total 6.2/167 6.3/170 6.4/173 6.5/176

Fuel consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 (g/km)

259Engine data

Safety First Controls and equipment Tips and Maintenance Technical Data

Maximum authorised weight in kg 2510b)

Weight in driving order (with driver) in kg 1724/2003

Authorised load on front axle in kg 1240

Authorised load on rear axle in kg 1280c)

Authorised load on roof in kg 75

Weights

Tow without brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 700

Tow with brake on slopes of up to 12% in kg 2000

Tow weights

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 l.

Engine oil capacity

b) The weight of 85 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer. c) The weight of 75 kg may be exceeded when towing a trailer.

K

260 Technical data

Technical data

Measurements and capacities

Length/Width 4634 mm/4739 mm 1810 mm/1816 mm

Height at free standing weight 1707 mm/1820 mm

Front and rear overhanga) 892 mm / 907 mm

Wheel base 2835 mm

Turning ratio 11.93 m

Front Rear

Wheel gaugeb) 1532 mm 1518 mm

1520 mm 1506 mm

Measurements

Fuel tank 70 l. Reserve of 8 l.

Windscreen/Headlight washer tank 3.5 l./6 l.

Capacities

a) Rear cantilever with tow hook 1.012 mm. b) Data varies according to type of tyre rim.

K

Summer tyres:

Tyre pressure is shown on the adhesive on the inside of the fuel cap.

Winter tyres:

The pressure of these tyres is identical to summer tyres. Just add 0.2 bars.

Tyre pressures

261General index

General index

A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Accessories and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Accessories, modifications and replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Adjustable steering column* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Adjusting armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Adjusting mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Adjusting the steering wheel position . . . . . . 118

Adjusting washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

After the running-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Air Bag system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,58

Air vents in drivers compartment (front) . . . . 139

Air vents in passenger compartment (rear) . . 140

Alloy wheels* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Altering stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Anti-dazzle interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Anti-locking brake system (ABS)* . . . . . . 59,162

Anti-skidding system of the drive wheels (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Anti-theft wheel bolts* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Applying harness belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Attaching child seats with the ISOFIX system 31

Audio set* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Automatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Automatic* anti-dazzle mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

B Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Belt tensioner* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Brake pad wear monitor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,161

C Care of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Cavity preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Central locking button* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Change battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Changing a fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Changing the wheels round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Changing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Checking acid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Checking coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Checking fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Child-proof catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Cleaning and anti-corrosion treatment of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Cleaning child seat cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Cleaning seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Cleaning slumber roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Cleaning the exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Coat hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Coming Home/Leaving Home* function . . . . 92

Coolant losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Coolant specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,63

Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Correct adjustment of head restraints . . . . . . 117

262 General index

Cruise control system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,154

D Data-carrying adhesive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Deactivate Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Description of anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . 79

Description of front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Description of side and head airbags . . . . . . 20

Detachable seat belts for the third row of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Diagnosis* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Digital clock* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Door lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Door, boot and window seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Doors, central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Drink can holder* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Drivers seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Driving a car with a manual gearbox . . . . . . . 143

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Driving in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Dust and pollen filter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

E EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Electric folding wing mirrors* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Electric socket in the centre console . . . . . . . 125

Electric sockets in luggage compartment* . . 126

Electric windows* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Electrically adjustable mirrors* . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Electrically operated vent wing windows* . . . 88

Electronic engine block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,72

Electronic stability program (ESP)* . . 59,94,165

Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Engine bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Engine failure* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Engine oil pressure/level* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Environment-friendly and economical driving 169

ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

F Filling the container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Filter preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

First aid kit, warning triangle* . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Fixing points for tow bar* . . . . . . . . . . . . 173,233

Foldable key* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Folding backrest forwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Folding seat back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Folding seat forwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Four-wheel drive* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

From 1,000 1,500 km . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Front interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Front reading light* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,105

Front windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Frontal collisions and the laws of physics . . . 8

Fuel Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Fuel reserve* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Function of electric windows with ignition on 85

Function of front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Function of head airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Function of side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Function of the electric windows with ignition switched off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Fuse colour code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Fuse layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

H Hand brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,149

Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

263General index

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,117

Headlight covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Headlight failure* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Headlight range control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Headlight washer system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Heated seats* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

How to fasten on the three point seat belt . . 16

How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

How to unfasten the three point seatbelt . . . 16

I If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

If the battery is disconnected and then reconnected... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Ignition key lock* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Indicators and dipped beam lever . . . . . . . . . 96

Individual opening of the doors . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Installing a radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Installing luggage compartment cover . . . . . 121

Installing seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Installing spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Instrument overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Integrated child seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,221

Interior light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Isofix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

J Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

K Key set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Keys with remote control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Kick-down device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Knurled wheel for seat heating* . . . . . . . . . . 94

L Lashing eyes* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Lifting points for workshop hoist and trolley jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Lights in the body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Lights in the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Lights next to the roof handle . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Locking and unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . 73,81

Long-term parking of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 195

Luggage compartment cover* . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Luggage compartment/Mesh partition* . . . . 119

M Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Measurements and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Mechanically operated vent wing windows . . 87

Mesh partition* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Mileage clock/Trip mileage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Mirror heating* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Mobile telephones and radio telephones . . . 223

Multi-function indicator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Multifunctional* steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 54

N Natural leather* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Navigation system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Notes for tyres where the direction of rotation is stipulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

O Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Onboard computer with multi-function indicator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Open door warning lamp* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Open tailgate warning lamp* . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

264 General index

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Opening and closing the opening roof . . . . . 89

Opening and closing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . 82

Opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Opening/closing vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140,141

Operating faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Outside temperature indicator* . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Overview of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . 43

Overview of the warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

P Paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Parking distance control (PDC)* . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Passenger side storage compartment . . . . . . 129

Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Plastic parts and leatherette . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Position of the ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Pre-heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . 39

Properties of RME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Protecting seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

R Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Radio-frequency remote control key* . . . . . . . 81

Rain sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Re-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Rear fog light* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Rear windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Releasing tank flap manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Releasing the harness belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Removable armrests* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Removing and installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,117

Removing luggage compartment cover . . . . . 121

Removing seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Removing spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Renewing the brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Renewing wheels/tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Returning seat to normal position . . . . . . . . . 35

Revolutions counter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

RME fuel (diester) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Roof rack/Roof railing* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

S Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Safety notes on using child seats . . . . . . . . . 25

Safety notes on using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . 11

Seat adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Seat arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Seat belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Seat belt retainer* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Seat belt warning lamp* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Seats and luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . 105

Seats in passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . 109

Securing the child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,144,148

Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,145

Service interval indicator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Servicing and replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Servobrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Setting the outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Side turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Single door opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

265General index

Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Speed regulator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Starting after running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . 153

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Steel wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Storing speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Stowage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126-129

Stowage of spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Stowage of tow bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Stowage of vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Switches in the central console . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Switching lights on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Switching off the alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Switching system off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . 155

Switching the system off completely . . . . . . . 156

T Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Temperature of the engine oil* . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

The concept of four-wheel drives . . . . . . . . . . 163

The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . 9

The diversity of the Alhambra . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

The first 1,500 km and afterwards . . . . . . . 167

The importance of correct seat adjustment . . 105

Three point seat belt for the second row central seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

To move seat backwards and forwards . . . . . 109

Topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Topping up engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Tow loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Tow starting/towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Toy bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Trailer turn signals* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Transport container for removable armrests* 109

Trolley jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Tyre life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

U Undercoating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Up to 1,000 kilometres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Upholstery cloth and textile trim . . . . . . . . . . 180

Using Climatronic economically . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Using the handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

V Vehicle data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Vehicle hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Vehicle jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Vehicle tools, towing bracket*, spare wheel . 202

Vehicles with removable ball coupling* on towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Vehicles without removable ball coupling on towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Vent in roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Vent wing* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Volumetric sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

W Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Warning lamps display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Warning notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Warnings on handling the battery . . . . . . . . . 193

Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Washing the vehicle by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

266 General index

Washing vehicle with high pressure cleaner . 178

Ways to secure a child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Weights and measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Wheelspin control (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,164

When are the Air Bags activated? . . . . . . . . . 21

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Windscreen heating* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Windscreen washer fluid level* . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Y Your vehicle and the environment . . . . . . . . . 167

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.04.05

In gl

s S

51 55

1A B

A 20

( 02

.0 5)

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Alhambra Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Alhambra Edition 02.05 2005 Minivan Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Alhambra as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Alhambra. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Alhambra Edition 02.05 2005 Minivan Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Alhambra Edition 02.05 2005 Minivan Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Alhambra Edition 02.05 2005 Minivan Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Alhambra Edition 02.05 2005 Minivan Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Alhambra Edition 02.05 2005 Minivan Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.